JP2019136360A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A gaming machine that displays a title for informing the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-101428

  In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects,
In the plurality of types of suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a structure, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
You may make it the ratio by which the case where the said 1st suggestion effect is performed is controlled to the said advantageous state is higher than the case where the said 2nd suggestion effect is performed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's action;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)),
An operational effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
As a suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (a second title reach title image 31AK062 displayed during the reach title production shown in FIG. 19D) (for example, an image) A display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120),
The display means includes
Plural types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc.) shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) A specific image (including a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame open. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial appearance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure in the characteristic part 112AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the right-handed instruction | indication notification process in the characteristic part 112AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion in the characteristic part 112AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the execution mode of the right-handed instruction | indication alert | report in characteristic part 112AK. It is a figure which shows the example operation | movement effect | action of the specific alerting | reporting in characteristic part 112AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prefetch notice setting process in characteristic part 113AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the holding | maintenance display stage determination table in characteristic part 113AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display stage change pattern determination table in characteristic part 113AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display stage change pattern determination table in characteristic part 113AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display stage change pattern determination table in characteristic part 113AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display stage change pattern determination table in characteristic part 113AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect production execution setting process in characteristic part 113AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect production in characteristic part 113AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the shape of the image displayed by the effect production in characteristic part 113AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation operation | movement in case the effect production in the characteristic part 113AK and the prefetch notice production are performed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in characteristic part 114AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the predetermined effect execution setting process in characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the common production | presentation in characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the execution result of the common effect in characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the kind of common production in characteristic part 114AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process in characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion in characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion aspect in characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the example production | presentation operation | movement of the common production | presentation in setting part 114AK, and a setting suggestion (suggestion production). It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion aspect in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in characteristic part 115AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process in characteristic part 115AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion in characteristic part 115AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion aspect in characteristic part 115AK. It is a figure which shows the example production | presentation operation | movement of the setting suggestion in characteristic part 115AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in characteristic part 115AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process in the characteristic part 116AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion in the characteristic part 116AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion aspect in the characteristic part 116AK. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect | action of the setting suggestion in characteristic part 116AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion mode setting process in characteristic part 117AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting suggestion mode in characteristic part 117AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion pattern setting process in characteristic part 117AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting suggestion pattern in characteristic part 117AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting suggestion mode setting screen in the characteristic part 117AK, and a setting suggestion pattern setting screen. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in characteristic part 118AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the selection effect execution setting process in the characteristic part 118AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the pattern of the choice in characteristic part 118AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process in the characteristic part 118AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion in the characteristic part 118AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion aspect in the characteristic part 118AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing in the feature portion 118AK. It is a figure which shows the example production | presentation operation example of the selection production | presentation and setting suggestion in the characteristic part 118AK. It is a figure which shows the example production | presentation operation example of the selection production | presentation and setting suggestion in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  It should be noted that in this specification, the comparison expression of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “difference”) means that one is a ratio of “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and reach types in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in this embodiment, the non-reach losing fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. , The variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the decorative pattern variable display mode is the reach mode and the display result is “lost”, and the display result is “big hit” Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, the reliability when each reach is executed (the jackpot reliability) is as follows: normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In FIG. 8A, a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed to a superreach level one level is shown, but a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of super reach production operation in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop and become a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, the entire screen of image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. The super reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP reach A” characters) is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs the sound corresponding to the reach title name (here “super reach A”). The title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 (here) Is displayed, and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach B. The Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9G, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory part until the notification is made, a super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the Super Reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but does not have to be completely coincident with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 9I, the contents of the effects common to those in FIG. 9C (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9J, the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. The

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the super reach E title 31AK010 (here, the letters “SP reach E”) is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9D, 9F, 9D). H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super reach when the reach is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. Things (title announcement using the entire screen) or the like may be used. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title announcements with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification, the expectation suggestion display is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expected level suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), etc., and the expected level may be suggested by a meter or a gauge. The numerical values may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily since any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a decision effect is displayed in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10D, the big hit combination is obtained. A definitive decorative symbol is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and executed in the lower right part of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in the figure, an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of super reach B is notified, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and sound, title notification by display and sound is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or displays a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may do it. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), a black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the degree-of-expected indication 31AK008. First, five white stars are displayed step by step. You may make it perform the expectation degree suggestion production which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 A performance that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 12F. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. However, there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation presentation when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, a title notification and an expectation suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted. In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  In FIG. 12, although the example of the production | presentation operation | movement when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated is shown, other reach productions (title notification, expectation suggestion production) by production mode (state when reach production is performed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of performing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggestion step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of increasing the number of black stars stepwise is completed, the button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the super reach C title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. The title of reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title or the degree of expectation indication changes may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, so that the Super Reach A title is notified. Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not a notice effect is executed and an effect aspect. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The thing which changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the display color of the title at a different rate. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and are in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. Further, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be varied depending on the type of super reach. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, according to the effect mode of the action effect, the rate at which at least one effect mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different. The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in what color (how many steps) may be changed. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect at a different ratio according to production | presentation mode. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the character action or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or the degree of expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect), the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when the predetermined timing before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), for example, a character 31AK041 that is a friendly character and a character 31AK042 that is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17C to 17F and FIGS. 18G to 18I, a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. To change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the decorative symbol variable display is started as shown in FIG. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination related to the shutter effect (whether the shutter effect is present or the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation regarding feature 121IW)
Next, the characteristic part 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 121IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 includes a glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window between a door open position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened centering on the left side and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the store clerk can use the gaming machine frame 121IW003 and glass. The door frame 121IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 121IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 has a setting key 121IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate), which will be described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 121IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052, is housed in the board case 121IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 121IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 121IW201.

  Since the board case 121IW201 having the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. In addition, since the setting key 121IW051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. The setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature part 121IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys, but may be shared by a single key.

  The substrate case 121IW201 is provided with a display monitor 121IW029 and a display changeover switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029. The display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 121IW201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized in the board case 121IW201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in this feature 121IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operated from the inside of the gaming island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this feature 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end of the outer frame 121IW001a includes a setting key 121IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A security cover 121IW500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 from the back side is attached. This security cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The plate-shaped synthetic resin material has permeability. The vertical dimension of the short piece 121IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. The security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 121IW001a via the front end of the short piece 121IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab contacts (or closes) from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the right part of the board case 121IW201 in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Accordingly, the right side portion of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 cannot be operated by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 to move from the long piece 121IW500Ab. By being separated, the covering state by the long piece 121IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes operable.

  In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 121IW is regulated such that the operation to the operation part including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is regulated by the security cover 121IW500A in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 121IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

  Since the board case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 unless a store clerk or the like of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 121IW003 with the door key.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, A fraudulent member such as a wire or a cell board is entered from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may cause an illegal act of changing the setting value, so that the setting key 121IW051 is changed over to the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500A when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Restricted state in which operation on operation unit including switch 121IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Even in a restricted state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered by the security cover 121IW500A, Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 121IW201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the seal seal.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the feature part 121IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and for determining the normal figure display result The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown) in FIG. 20-5 (A) 20), a loss variation pattern determination table, a general diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a general diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), and the like shown in FIG.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature 121IW is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature 121IW, the winning probability for small hits is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the winning combination is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at probable change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “2” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at non-probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. Winning is won.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Win a big hit with a higher probability (1/300 for non-probable change, 1/30 for probable change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “3”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) than in the case of “2”. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “2”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “2”.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. Note that “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C) indicate the probability (proportion) of being a big hit and the probability (proportion) of being a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. However, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, a case where the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of the set value, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the jackpot winning probability, the winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference in the winning probability for the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference in the winning probability for the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability per hit at the set value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability per hit at the set value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, You may set so that the winning probability per small hit at setting value “3” may be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration indicated by the feature 121IW may be applied.

  In this feature 121IW, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20 (C) to determine whether to win or not. The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit determination is performed depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the second.

  Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the case where the advantage becomes higher in the order of the setting value “1” <the setting value “2” <the setting value “3” is shown. For example, the priority ranking according to the gaming state May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be controlled to a high probability / high base state, to maintain a high probability / high base state until the next big hit, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a period in which a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a winning ball can be easily obtained. Therefore, unlike the other gaming states, in the specific gaming state (in this example, high probability / high base state), conversely, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value “1” may be set to the highest advantage.

  In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end count) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of times of completion, the probability variation continuation rate (recession rate) may increase in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  In this feature part 121IW, three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature 121IW, a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol variation display is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is comprised so that it may be used, a different table may be provided and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined may be different.

  In the jackpot type determination table, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type is assigned for each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. Note that a determination value corresponding to a random number is actually assigned to a loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In order to simplify the above, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high and the set value is “2”. When the ratio determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined for the jackpot type A is high.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 121IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the feature section 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. It has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit gaming state is started. This is a period in which a fanfare effect is performed as an effect operation to be notified.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the production control board 12 side, This is a period in which an interval effect as an effect operation for informing the start of the round is executed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot end process in step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be shorter.

  As described above, in the feature unit 121IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of being determined as the big hit type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as the big hit type A is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature 121IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. At the same time, the set value is “1”. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is increased in the order of “<2” <“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of winning the jackpot (race rate) is high, the average duration of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  This feature 121IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggest a set value during the big hit game, but this big hit suggestion effect is used for the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the big hit suggestion effect, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  Also, in this feature 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each set value is different, so that the jackpot When the winning probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods with different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which determination values are set so that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period in which relatively long periods are set is increased in the order of jackpot type A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature part 121IW, in any case of jackpot type A to jackpot type C, the time-shortening control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a special number of times (100 times in this feature part 121IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time-shortening control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time reduction control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot is generated again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. You may be made to do. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. This feature 121IW is configured such that the ratio of winning big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or in place of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. You may make it a rate (renso ratio) differ.

  Also, in this feature part 121IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, presence / absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.) in the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the fanfare period, the interval Although the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the presence or absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, and the advantage differ You may do it. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  The feature unit 121IW exemplifies a mode in which, depending on the set value, the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, there is one jackpot type that cannot be determined among jackpot type A, jackpot type B, jackpot type C, or There may be multiple. In other words, depending on the set value, the determination rate of the jackpot type is different, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100% Included in determining by percentage.

  In addition, in this feature 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type. However, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to such a mode. You may comprise so that a period may differ. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period corresponding to the set value may be determined uniformly according to any of the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on whether the set value is “1” to “3”, the lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the feature unit 121IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value that has been set, so that the game entertainment can be improved. .

  In this feature 121IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in this feature part 121IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability are increased, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Moreover, in this feature part 121IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, the gameability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. The game state after the big hit game is controlled to be a probable state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. As a gameability (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (during time-short control). Good. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as 1 to 3 and the game is the same, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than those in the case where these set values are any one of 1 to 3. Thus, a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a probable change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in this feature 121IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in this feature 121IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “3”.

  In addition, in this feature part 121IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the opening period and the number of opening of the big winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantage degree in the game is the same. .

(Fluctuation pattern judgment table)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature 121IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting change is performed at power-on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( Hereinafter, it is configured to use different loss variation pattern determination tables.

  Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, the fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 121IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be used in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using a real-time clock or the like. In addition, a period until the first big hit is generated may be a special period.

  Each of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is a normal reach loss or a super reach loss in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested depending on the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

  Also, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency at which normal reach is executed than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value). And can enhance the entertainment interests of the game.

  For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern) is determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it do. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested depending on the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be varied according to the set value.

  Also, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, except for non-reach loss, depending on the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the normal reach loss: super reach loss balance) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss is remarkably increased in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), the normal reach loss is performed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The ratio is slightly higher (in this example, it is higher by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency of normal reach loss and super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In this feature 121IW, setting suggestion effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values. This is because the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the entire super reach lose differ according to the set values, and according to the set values. This is a concept including that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only the normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

  The feature 121IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature part 121IW. For example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is different from the normal pattern and the set value is 1 or 2). May be selected only in the special period, and the special variation pattern may be selected only in the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature 121IW, a plurality of types of non-reach losing variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach losing, it is further determined as one of non-reach losing A to C. It is configured. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the reach variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 includes non-reach loses A to C, and any of non-reach loses A to C, normal reach loses, and super reach loses. You may comprise so that it may determine.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach loss C (fluctuation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2”. ", The ratio determined to non-reach loss B (fluctuation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (fluctuation time 9 seconds) is high. A judgment value is assigned to.

  In the feature unit 121IW, when the setting value is “1”, since the ratio that is determined to be non-reach loss C is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss is likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as non-reach loss A is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature 121IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. At the same time, the set value is “1”. ”<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”in order, the average variation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the big hit (race rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling ability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  The feature 121IW is configured to have different average fluctuation times by changing the ratio of non-reach loses A to C with different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the variation times are different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when multiple types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, it is possible to vary the display time of the decorative symbols, such as shaking display of high-speed variation display, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

  In addition, in the feature unit 121IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a fixed decorative design (final decoration pattern (final) is used. The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In addition, this feature 121IW is configured so that the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C is determined for each set value, thereby winning the big hit When the probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average variation time is increased, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the variation time of each variation pattern for each set value May be set to be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (the winning rate) of the jackpot is higher.

  In this feature 121IW, a shortening variation pattern having a variation time shorter than that of other variation patterns is provided. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach losing (variation time 1.5 seconds) shorter than non-reach losing A (variation time 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, the state is canceled and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. For this reason, in this feature 121IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more may be varied according to the set value.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 121IW will be described. FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. In this feature 121IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is made, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 121IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the production control means activation wait timer (step 121IWS004), and checks whether the value of the production control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004, and the processes of steps 121IWS004 to S005 are repeated. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 121IWS006 is executed after waiting for the effect control CPU 120 to start up, and the setting value change and confirmation, RAM initialization and recovery processing, etc. are executed. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the production control CPU 120 is activated. Occurrence can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 103, for example, clears a factory default setting flag indicating that the factory default setting is stored in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). In step 121IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that the setting value remains unchanged from the factory is set, and the value of the setting value is set in step 121IWS006. It may be confirmed whether or not the value at the time of shipment from the factory remains the same. If the factory default setting is maintained (step 121IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 121IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 performs backup to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as step S4. It is determined whether data is stored (step 121IWS007). Specifically, in step 121IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. (Step 121IWS008). In step 121IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping power supply. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if power interruption or the like occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  In step 121IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 121IW029.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing (step 121IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance display such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base is displayed. This information is not cleared but retained. In the RAM clear 1 process, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is OFF (N in Step 121IWS011), when the setting key 121IW051 is OFF (N in Step 121IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In step 121IWS013 N), the process does not proceed to step 121IWS014, but shifts to a loop process.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS006 to S014 is executed, in this feature unit 121IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 121IWS007 and S008), or when the setting at the time of factory shipment is left (step 121IWS006 Y), if a power interruption occurs during the setting change (step 121IWS009 Y), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 opened. On the condition that the RAM is cleared, the set value can be changed after step 121IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, the setting value cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS017). If setting key 121IW051 is on, CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that setting confirmation processing is to be started to effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

  Upon receiving the setting confirmation processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control for notifying that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the presentation control board 12 may be configured such that when a presentation operation button such as the push button 31B is pressed, “maintenance mode” or the like is displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. “Maintenance mode” refers to, for example, the date / time setting of the real-time clock, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what type of error occurred), the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change This is a mode in which the recording of setting values can be confirmed. When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are finished, the maintenance mode is also finished.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

  When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped, by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in Step 121IWS016) or the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in Step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 121IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production | presentation control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production | presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 121IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 2 process (step 121IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, the role ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared but are retained.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 121IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating the start of the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). Upon receiving the setting change processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (step 121IWS029).

  When the setting change process ends, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS030). In addition, CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to effect control board 12 (step 121IWS031). In addition, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in Step 121IWS025) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in Step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  In this feature 121IW, the processes of steps IWS034 to S036 are the same as the processes of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (step 121IWS019).

  In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies a setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSA02). If setting key 121IW051 is on, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02, and the processes of steps 121IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting check error process (step 121IWSA04). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing. In step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that it is a setting confirmation error, and executes the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. In this example, when the setting check error process is executed, the process shifts to a loop process, so that the error state is continued until the power is turned on again and the process is not allowed to proceed.

  If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process of step 121IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

  Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 121IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to “2”, and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029. May update the display on the display monitor 121IW029 to “3”, and if “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated to “1”. Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value) (step 121IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02, and the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in an open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processing of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting change error process (step 121IWSB07). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing. In step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating a setting change error, and executes a setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to a loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the process does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 121IWS027, after the power is turned on again, the RAM clear 1 process is executed (see Y in step 121IWS009, 121IWS014). The error state will be released.

  If setting key 121IW051 is not on, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process of step 121IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

  FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram of processing executed when the power is turned on. In this feature 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on), the clear switch is on. If so, a setting change process (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch is OFF, a setting confirmation process (steps 121IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 121IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the restoration process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Executed.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends. Note that when the big prize opening is open, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, at the timing when the power is turned off, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big prize opening.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when a store clerk or the like of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  When the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 121IW052 by a game shop clerk or the like. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →... Each time the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is operated). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 121IW029 to blink on the basis of the fact that the setting key 121IW051 is turned OFF by the operation of the store clerk or the like of the game hall. To the store clerk and the like that the new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. In the illustrated example, the display monitor 121IW029 is displayed in a blinking manner, but it may be turned off.

  Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12 (A) (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the jackpot is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a change display result, a jackpot type, a change pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be executed.

  In the setting change process in the feature unit 121IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of this feature 121IW), or the most advantageous for the player The set value (“3” in the case of this feature 121IW) may be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-12, the setting value is displayed using the first display among the four-digit displays of the display monitor 121IW029 when the setting value is confirmed or changed. For example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 121IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is “1”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays “−S−1” in four digits, and if the set value is “2”, “−S-2” is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. The display monitor 121IW029 may display “−S-3” as a 4-digit display if the set value is “3”. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the setting value is “1”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays four digits “1111”, and if the setting value is “2”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays four digits “2222”. May be.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the feature unit 121IW will be described. FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 121IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step 121IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step 121IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 121IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 121IWS102 to S104, in this feature 121IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. However, the display of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning port and the second starting winning port. May be configured to execute.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 121IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS108). As already described, in this feature section, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 121IWS031, but even after the power is turned on, the step 121IWS108 is sent. The set value command is transmitted every time the display of variation is started by executing the above process.

  Even if the same variation pattern is used, if a variation pattern command different for each set value is transmitted, the variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. As a result, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the configuration may be such that the set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are equivalent to the number of setting values. May be provided.

  Further, in this example, the case where the same set value command is transmitted for the set value command transmitted at power-on (see step 121IWS031) and the set value command transmitted at the start of fluctuation (see step 121IWS108) is shown. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the set value command for turning on the power and the set value command for starting the change may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be sent when the power is turned on and when the change is started. Good.

  Also, in this example, a case is shown in which a set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation, but it is configured to transmit an effect control command that uses both the variation pattern command and the set value command. Also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the setting value is “1”, and when the variation value command is “2”. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which set value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. You may comprise so that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio may differ. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. The ratio may be selected, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence or number of pseudo-continuations, presence / absence and type of reach are different. Also, in this case, for example, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is selected uniformly, or when the set value command cannot be received normally, the dedicated selection ratio The change pattern may be selected with the.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the current gaming state (step 121IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state background designation command when in the probability variation state, and performs control to transmit the time variation background designation command in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control to send a normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random value MR1, and determines that the big hit or small hit is determined if they match. A program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in Step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (Step 121IWS111). If it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 121IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step 121IWS112), and proceeds to step 121IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in Step 121IWS111), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to Step 121IWS116.

  When the value of the random value MR1 matches any one of the big hit determination values (Y in step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to select a type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A ”,“ Big hit type B ”or“ big hit type C ”) is determined as the big hit type (step 121 IWS 114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is “big hit type A”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “big hit type B”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type When the big hit type is “big hit type C”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, “7” as the big hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to jackpot classification. For example, when the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS117).

(Direction mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in this feature 121IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in the feature part 121IW. In this feature part 121IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control random number update process in step S77, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect mode change process for changing the effect mode (step 121IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

  In this feature part 121IW, it is possible to control to three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C. For example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters appearing in the notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process in step 121IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the production control board 12, the production mode may be changed based on a predetermined date or time based on the date / time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the decision to change the presentation mode.

  In step 121IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the changed effect mode may be set, and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode A, the production mode A flag may be set, and the production mode B flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode B, the production mode B flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode C, the production mode C flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order, such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A →. You may make it change randomly from mode AC.

(Command analysis processing)
20-16 to 20-18 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 121IWS303). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 121IWS304), effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 121). 121IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a setting value command reception flag indicating that the setting value command has been normally received at least once after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (step 121IWS306).

  In this feature 121IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. The Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where no set value is stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting check process or the recovery process is executed. A configuration value command may be transmitted whenever the power is turned on.

  In this feature 121IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting changing process is performed. However, the setting value command is normal due to a command missing or garbled data. If it cannot be received at the same time, the process of step 121 IWS 305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature 121IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the processing of step 121IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It is executed, and the set value can be stored in the set value storage area.

  Even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 reads the set value command, You may comprise so that it may be determined whether the setting value contained is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from “1” to “3”, but “5” or “10” is not set and includes a value that does not have a flaw. In such a case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, the newly received set value command is used. It may be configured to determine that an inconsistency has occurred and to determine that there is an abnormality when the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, it is determined that the setting value command has not been received normally, and the rendering is limited according to the processing method indicated by the feature unit 121IW. You may comprise.

(Initial outcome setting)
In the feature part 121IW, when the presentation control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, the setting change process end command, and the setting confirmation process end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process. In the image display device 5, control for displaying a predetermined initial appearance (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols that is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variation display is started). Perform (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance production).

  If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 121IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial appearance determination table is used to determine whether the combination of an even number of initial designs (for example, “246” or “224”), which is a combination of even numbers of decorative symbols, and an odd number of decorative designs. A certain odd initial appearance (for example, “135”, “113”, etc.) and a special initial appearance that is a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) are determined (step 121 IWS 309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  20-19 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial outcome determination table. In step 121IWS309, the lottery process based on the random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the ratio determined to the odd initial appearance is higher in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the game starts, if the odd initial outcome is displayed, the setting is changed, and the set value is advantageous compared to the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the special initial appearance may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game starts, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, which can enhance the interest.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 121IWS310). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the initial output determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) to determine the initial output (step 121IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS310 to S311 is executed, in this feature 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting The initial outcome is determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined to be the odd initial outcome is the lowest, and it is not determined to be the special initial outcome. Such a configuration reduces the situation where an odd initial appearance or special initial outcome is displayed and a player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set, and the game is less interesting. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS312). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial outcome using the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  20-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), in the initial outcome determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to be an odd initial outcome as compared to the setting value “3” that is most advantageous to the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case that it is determined as a special initial appearance.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS312 to S313, in this feature 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of this, the odd initial appearance and special initial outcome are displayed to reduce the situation where the player is discouraged and discouraged, and the fall of interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial appearance determined in steps 121IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 121IWS314).

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance as an even initial appearance, and the image display device 5. , The control for displaying the even initial number is performed (step 121IWS315).

  When the processing of step 121IWS315 is executed, the feature unit 121IW uniformly displays the even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode B. This can reduce the situation of disappointing the player by dismissing the odd initial appearance or special initial appearance even though an unfavorable set value is set, and prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. I have to.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the rendering mode B, the odd initial appearance symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the odd-numbered initial appearance symbol determination ratio is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye symbol may be determined.

  In this example, the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is shown is a case where the even initial appearance is uniformly displayed. However, such a mode is not limited. . For example, when the set value command has not been received normally and in the production mode B, the set value command such as a combination of symbols “???” cannot be normally received as the initial appearance. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial outcome. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest any setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial appearance.

  Further, the processing when the set value command cannot be received normally (or when the set value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when N is determined in step 121IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored as a default in the setting value storage area to determine the initial outcome. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command has not been received normally can be stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. Also good.

  If the received effect control command is one of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, and the setting confirmation process end command (step 121IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 The initial appearance is determined to be the even initial appearance, and the image display device 5 performs control to display the even initial appearance (step 121IWS317). In the feature unit 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be the even initial appearance and is not determined to be the odd initial appearance. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial appearance. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

  If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 121IWS 318), the effect control CPU 120 executes a RAM error notification (step 121IWS 319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “RAM error abnormality has occurred” on the image display device 5, and outputs a sound indicating a RAM error abnormality or an error sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R. Or the game effect lamp 9 or LED is controlled to emit light with a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound of the maximum volume or the error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits light with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full color LED). It is desirable to emit white light).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 121IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command formed in the RAM. Store in the area (step 121IWS321). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit or whether to make a big hit, a big hit type or a small hit type) (step 121IWS323), for the production control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS324).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (an effect control command for designating the display of a decorative symbol stop symbol) (step 121IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag ( Step 121 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 121IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 121IWS328).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 121IWS330).

  The received effect control command designates whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit pre-determined by the symbol designation command (start winning determination process (see step S101)), and whether the big hit type or the small hit type is determined (Step 121IWS331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received symbol designation command in the first available storage area in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS331). Step 121 IWS 332).

  If the received effect control command is a variation category command (an effect control command for designating a determination result of a variation category (variation pattern type or variation pattern) determined in advance by the start winning determination process (see step S101)) (step 121IWS333). ), The effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM (step). 121IWS 334).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step 121IWS335), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received first reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. The storage area is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored (step 121IWS 336). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS337). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS338).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step 121IWS339), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received second reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step 121IWS 340). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increments the hold display by one in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the second hold storage number display (step 121IWS341). Further, the production control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS342).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS343), the effect control CPU 120 erases one reserved display in the first reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The hold display is shifted one by one, and the first hold storage number display is updated (step 121IWS344). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS345).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS 346), the effect control CPU 120 erases one reserved display in the second reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The hold display is shifted one by one, and the second hold storage number display is updated (step 121IWS347). Further, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS348).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 121IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS301.

  The feature 121IW is configured not to display the odd initial outcome when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, the odd initial outcome may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined for the odd-numbered initial appearance may differ depending on the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial appearance or even initial output, an initial output that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied and set) It may be determined that the value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined), an initial appearance that the specific setting value is determined, and the like may be displayed according to the setting value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, the possibility of being the setting value 1 is denied when the specific initial appearance is displayed by preventing the setting of the specific initial appearance, and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. Also, for example, only when the setting value is 3, by determining the specific initial appearance, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. . In addition, when determining the initial appearance, it may be determined as one of these initial outcomes by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
The feature unit 121IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion) that suggests the set value, the above-described initial appearance effect and the setting suggestion based on the above-described variation pattern determination tendency are executed. It is configured to be possible. It should be noted that the pre-game suggestion effect that is executed before the game starts, the game suggestion effect that is executed during the game (for example, during the display of variation of the decorative pattern), and the big hit that is executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) The suggestion effect may be configured to be executable. In this case, in this feature unit 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect may be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes each having different suggestion reliability. The reliability of suggestion may be different for each type. For example, the suggestion level before the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> the suggestion effect during the game or the suggestion effect before the game> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> Suggestion during game> Direction suggestion during jackpot> Pre-game suggestion effect, or suggestion during jackpot suggestion> Indication suggestion during game> Indication before game suggestion The reliability of the suggestion may be increased. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute a part of the setting suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect that suggests that the setting change has been performed) or all, or the execution ratio The setting may be changed so as to be lowered (or raised). For example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and setting related to the setting suggestion effect by operating an operation means such as a push button 31B or an operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only an administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Explanation regarding the feature 112AK)
Next, the feature part 112AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special chart waiting process executed by the feature unit 112AK. In the special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hitting start command reception waiting time has elapsed (step S600). The winning start designation command reception waiting time is set for a predetermined time in accordance with reception of a decorative symbol stop command in the variable display effect processing in step S182.

  In step S600, when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed (step S600; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S601). . If a big hit start designation command is received (step S601; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to “6” which is a value corresponding to the big hit medium production processing (step S602).

  In step S602, a jackpot notification effect control pattern prepared in advance for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state is selected and set as a usage pattern (step S604). Thereafter, settings for starting control of the big hit notification operation are performed based on the production control execution data read from the production control pattern set as the usage pattern (step S605). Then, a right-handed instruction notification process for performing a right-handed instruction notification is performed (step 112AKS001).

  In the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 112AK, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a passing gate 41 are provided in the right game area on the right side for the player. Therefore, when the high opening control is performed together with the time-shortening control, if the game ball is launched toward the right game area, the game ball passes through (enters) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. )It's easy to do. In addition, since the time-saving control is performed, it is possible to quickly digest the special game and shorten the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit”. Thus, in the time-short state in which the high-opening control is performed together with the time-shortening control, the optimal launch position (launch target position) of the game ball in the game area is the right game area. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 112AK, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area. Therefore, when the big winning opening is changed between the open state (first state) and the closed state (second state) under the control of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the game ball is launched toward the right game area. For example, there is a possibility that a large number of prize balls may be obtained as prizes when game balls pass (enter) through the big prize opening. In this way, when the big prize opening changes between the open state (first state) and the closed state (second state) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the optimal launch position of the game ball in the game area (Launch target position) is the right game area. In step 112AKS001, processing is performed to notify the player that the optimal launch position (launch target position) of the game ball in the game area is the right game area.

  FIG. 20-21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a right-handed instruction notification process executed in step 112AKS001 in FIG. 20-20. In the right-handed instruction notification process shown in FIG. 20-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform a setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion) that suggests a setting value in the right-handed instruction notification (step 112AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 112AKS002, whether or not the setting suggestion is executed is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-22, the ratio that the setting suggestion is executed in the order of big hit type A <big hit type B <big hit type C is high. In this embodiment, the big hit type A and the big hit type B are big hits with 16 rounds in the big hit game (16R big hits), and the big hit type C is a big hit with 4R rounds in the big hit game (4R big hits) ). That is, in the feature part 112AK, the ratio of the big hit type A and the big hit type B, which are advantageous to the player, compared to the big hit type C is lower in the rate of setting suggestion than the big hit type A and the big hit type B. The rate of execution of setting suggestion is higher in the jackpot type C having a lower advantage. Therefore, the player's attention can be gathered even for the big hit type C big hit with low advantage, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Note that the number of rounds is not limited. For example, a non-probabilistic big hit has a higher rate of setting suggestion, such as a non-probable big hit, and a big hit with a lower advantage than one big win has a higher advantage. Setting suggestion should be made at a higher rate than jackpot. Furthermore, it is not limited to the big hit type. For example, when setting suggestion is performed during variable display, if the gaming state is the normal state, the setting suggestion is given at a higher rate than other than the normal state (probability change state or short time state). It only has to be done.

  Returning to FIG. 20-21, after performing the process of step 112AKS002, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the setting suggestion in step 112AKS002, that is, whether there is a setting suggestion (step 112AKS003). ). When there is no setting suggestion, that is, when it is determined in step 112AKS002 that setting suggestion is not to be executed (step 112AKS003; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs normal mode right-handed instruction notification, that is, right-handed without setting suggestion. It is determined to perform the instruction notification (step 112AKS004). Here, the right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode is performed by displaying the message “Right-handed right!” As in the right-handed command notification 112AK001 in the normal mode shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 112AKS002 that the setting suggestion is to be executed, that is, if there is a setting suggestion (step 112AKS003; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines an execution mode of the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion (step 112AKS005). Specifically, in the process of step 112AKS005, based on the set value that has been set, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. It determines as an aspect. The right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion in this embodiment includes the right-handed instruction notification 112AK001 in the normal mode shown in FIG. 20-24 and the modes 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 20-24 (A) to (C). The right-handed instruction notification 112AK002 of the aspect is included, and the right-handed instruction notification 112AK002 of the first to third aspects indicates the setting value. The right-handed instruction notification of aspect 1 in this embodiment suggests that the set value is “1”, and the right-handed instruction notification of aspect 2 suggests that the set value is “2”. The right handed instruction notification of 3 indicates that the set value is “3”. In addition to the setting value itself, for example, it is suggested that the setting value is not “1”, is a high setting value, is an even setting value, or is an odd setting value, May be suggested by each aspect. In the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion, the right-handed instruction notification 112AK001 of the normal mode shown in FIG. 20-24 is performed, and then the right-hand side of the modes 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 20-24A to 20C. The strike instruction notification 112AK002 is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention on whether the right-handed instruction notification of the specific mode is performed after the right-handed instruction notification of the normal mode is performed, and to which mode of the right-handed command notification is performed You can attract the attention of players. In the feature part 112AK, the right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode and the right-handed command notification in the specific mode are combined and referred to as specific notification for explaining the game. That is, in the characteristic portion 112AK, when the right-handed instruction notification in the specific mode is performed after the right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode is performed, and after the right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode is performed, There is a case where the hit instruction notification is not performed, and the specific notification can be noticed. FIG. 20-24 illustrates a specific notification effect operation example including the right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode and the right-handed command notification in the specific mode.

  As shown in FIG. 20-23, in the characteristic portion 112AK, the determination ratio is set such that the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion can be executed at different execution ratios depending on the set setting value. ing. Therefore, the specific notification of the execution mode that differs depending on the set value is executed at different execution ratios, so that the effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that specific notifications of different execution modes are executed at different execution rates, that is, executed only by different execution modes including the types, modes, and execution ratios of the specific notifications to be executed. There is. Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-23, the right-handed instruction notification in mode 3 is determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, when the right-handed instruction notification of aspect 3 is performed as the specific notification, it is determined that the setting value is “3”. On the other hand, the right-handed instruction notification in modes 1 and 2 is determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, the suggestion reliability differs between the case where the right-handed instruction notification of aspect 1 or aspect 2 is performed and the case where the right-handed instruction notification of aspect 3 is performed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the right-handed instruction notification in a mode with different suggestion reliability, and it is possible to enhance the effect. For example, as the number of fluctuations increases, a right-handed instruction notification with a higher degree of reliability can be executed, or a right-handed instruction notification with a higher degree of reliability at the end of business than at the start of the game hall. Depending on the situation, the reliability of the suggestion based on the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion may be different. In this case, for example, a table set separately from the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 20-23 (with a higher suggestion reliability and a determination ratio set) is provided, and the table to be selected is changed and specified according to the situation. What is necessary is just to determine the execution aspect of alerting | reporting. According to this, since the reliability of the suggestion varies depending on the situation, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  20-21, after executing the process of step 112AKS004 or step 112AKS005, the effect control CPU 120 executes the right-handed instruction notification of the determined execution mode (step 112AKS006), and ends the right-handed instruction notification process. . In addition, when the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion is executed in step 112AKS006, the specific notification shown in FIGS. 20-24 is executed. In addition to displaying images on the image display device 5, a right-handed instruction notification is performed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operations of the light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. May be. Also, the right-handed instruction notification once performed is erased at the timing when the optimal launch position (launch target position) of the game ball in the game area is no longer in the right game area, for example, the timing when the short-time state ends. That's fine.

  Returning to FIG. 20-20, after executing the process of step 112AKS001, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the waiting process per special figure.

  If no big hit start designation command has been received in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit start designation command has been received (step S608). If no small hit start designation command is received (step S608; No), the special figure waiting process is terminated and the process waits until the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses. When the small hit start designation command is received (step S608; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production processing (step S609). The hit waiting process is terminated. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed in step S600 (step S600; Yes), the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S613). The waiting process per special figure is terminated.

(Modification of feature 112AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-24, the right-handed instruction notification 112AK001 in the normal mode displays the message “Please turn right!”, And the right-handed command notification 112AK002 in the specific mode is displayed. Although the example which displays the image of the arrow pointing right like the aspects 1-3 shown to FIGS. 20-24 (A)-(C) with the pattern according to the aspect was shown, this is an example. As a right-handed instruction notification including a setting suggestion, for example, a right-pointing instruction notification in a normal mode is displayed in addition to the message “Right-handed!” In addition to a right-pointing arrow image (the mode may be one mode) Setting suggestion may be performed by displaying a character image above the arrow. Specifically, the character A may be displayed in the case of the mode A, the character B may be displayed in the case of the mode B, and the character C may be displayed in the case of the mode C. In addition, for example, the right-handed instruction notification 112AK002 or the character may be different depending on the suggestion reliability. According to this, since the kind of setting suggestion differs according to the reliability, the range of effects is widened, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Moreover, although the example which includes setting suggestion in the right-handed instruction notification is shown in the above embodiment, this is an example. The setting suggestion only needs to be included in the effect that explains the game. For example, in the effect that explains to the player that a predetermined item or character is acquired and the mission is cleared, the right-handed instruction notification is performed. Setting suggestion may be performed by displaying a specific mode. Further, for example, when explaining the capture information (for example, which type of production has a high expectation degree of jackpot) to the player in the video played during the demonstration, the display of the specific mode is used. Setting suggestion may be performed by performing.

(Explanation of means related to the feature 112AK)
With respect to the above-described feature part 112AK, there is a conventional gaming machine that can change settings related to a game, for example, in JP 2010-200902A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 112AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production,
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
One of setting values (for example, any one of setting values 1 to 3) can be set from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.
Specific notification means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control that performs right-handed instruction notification) capable of performing specific notification for explaining the game,
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification according to a different execution mode depending on a set value that is set (for example, a setting suggestion based on a different execution mode at a different execution rate depending on the set value that is set). Right-handed instruction notification (specific notification) including
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic part 112AK,
Can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state includes at least a first advantageous state (for example, 4R big hit of big hit type C) and a second advantageous state (for example, 16R big hit of big hit type A or B) more advantageous than the first advantageous state. ,
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification when controlled to the first advantageous state (for example, the big hit type C having a lower advantage than the big hit type A or the big hit type B has a setting suggestion). Etc.)
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part 112AK characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the first advantageous state with a low degree of advantage, and the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of means 3 relating to the characteristic part 112AK,
The specific notification means performs the specific notification so that the effect is executed in a different execution mode according to the set value after executing a common effect (for example, right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode) regardless of the set value. Executable (for example, a right-handed instruction notification in a specific mode is performed after a right-handed command notification in a normal mode is performed)
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 112AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the specific notification is executed.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 112AK,
The specific notification means is suggested as the specific notification more than the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed instruction notification in aspect 1 or 2) that suggests a set value that has been set, and the first specific notification. Second specific notification (for example, right-handed instruction notification of aspect 3) with high reliability of the set value can be executed,
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 112AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 112AK,
The specific notification means can execute the specific notification in different execution modes depending on the situation (for example, execute a right-handed instruction notification with a higher reliability of suggestion near the end of business than at the start of business in a game hall) Is possible),
It may be a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic part 112AK characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 related to the feature 112AK,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, initial appearance effect) (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the CPU 120 for effect control) ) And
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by a special initial appearance) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by an even initial appearance) can be executed,
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 By executing step 121IWS313, the initial appearance effect by the special initial appearance is not executed)
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 5 according to the characteristic portion 112AK.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding the feature 113AK)
Next, the feature part 113AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch notice setting process executed by the feature unit 113AK. When the prefetch notice setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command is received (step 113AKS101). When it is determined that the start winning command is received (step 113AKS101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning port designation command received in the low base state or the high base It is determined whether or not it is any of the second start winning opening designation commands received in the state (step 113AKS102). In the present embodiment, by performing the process of step 113AKS102, in the low base state, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed when the holding memory increases based on the winning to the first start winning opening, and the high base state Then, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning at the second start winning opening.

  When it is determined that it is either the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 113AKS102; Yes), the production control CPU 120 Determines the final stage of the hold display (step 113AKS103). The CPU 120 for effect control, for example, in the hold display stage determination table shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A) to (C) stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 according to the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display. One of them is referred to according to the set value that has been set, and the final stage in the first hold display or the second hold display (how many stages are changed when the pre-reading notice effect is executed) is determined. The effect control CPU 120 may obtain the variable display variable display result and the variation pattern with reference to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result designation command included in the start winning prize command.

  Next, determination of the final display stage of the hold display will be specifically described. In the present embodiment, a pre-reading notice effect (hold notice effect) that changes the display mode (shape or color) of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet been started is executed. The pending display stage determination table shown in FIG. 20-26 is a table for determining in advance the display mode (also referred to as “final display stage”) of the pending display, which is the final stage of the change (transition) of the display mode. As shown in FIG. 20-26, the hold display stage determination table determines whether the final display stage is stage 1 to stage 4 for each variable display result (including jackpot type and variation pattern). The decision percentage is assigned. More specifically, the variable display results are classified into “big hit (probability / non-probability change)”, “big hit (probability)”, “losing (super reach) / small hit”, and “other than the above”. Different determination ratios are assigned to “stage 1”, “stage 2”, “stage 3”, and “stage 4” prepared as final display stages.

  As shown in FIG. 20-26, in the feature portion 113AK, the display mode of the final stage of the hold display is “white” that is stage 1 <“blue” that is stage 2 <“green” that is stage 3 <stage 4 < The expectation of jackpot is higher in the order of “red”. Note that the display mode of “white” that is stage 1 is a normal mode, and if the display mode of the final stage is determined to be “white”, the display mode of the hold display does not change, that is, the pre-reading notice effect is displayed. Indicates that it will not be executed. Therefore, in order to distinguish the “blue” to “red” modes in stages 2 to 4 from the normal modes, they are referred to as specific modes. Further, in the feature portion 113AK, as shown in FIG. 20-26, the ratio of which display mode at the final stage of the hold display is different depends on which setting value is set. Therefore, since the ratio of the display mode of the hold display at the final stage varies depending on the set value, it is possible to enhance the effect. Also, in the characteristic portion 113AK, as shown in FIG. 20-26, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice effect varies depending on which setting value is set (the rate at which the display mode of the hold display does not change is different). ). Therefore, since the ratio of whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes according to the set value, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (C), when the set value is “3”, if the display mode of the hold display at the final stage is “red”, the variable display result is “big hit”. On the other hand, when the set value is other than “3”, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A) and (B), the display mode of the hold display at the final stage is “red”. Even in such a case, the variable display result may be “lost”. Therefore, when the set value is “1” or “2”, the display mode of the last stage hold display is “red”, and when the set value is “3”, the display mode of the last stage hold display. The big hit expectation degree becomes lower than the case where is “red”. As described above, in the feature portion 113AK, even if the display mode of the hold display at the final stage is the same, the big hit expectation is different depending on the set value. According to this, the big hit expectation degree in the display mode of the hold display differs depending on the set value, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  After determining the final stage of the hold display by the processing of step 113AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display stage and the first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command decided in step 113AKS103. The display stage change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved storages indicated in any one (step 113AKS104). It should be noted that the number of reserved memories is determined when the first start winning prize designation command is received at step 113AKS102, when the first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received, and when the second start winning prize designation command is received, It may be specified by referring to the second special figure reserved memory number designation command. In the process of step 113AKS104, the display stage change pattern in the first hold display or the second hold display is determined with reference to the display stage change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20-27 to 20-30. The display stage change pattern indicates a change pattern such as which stage is shifted to which stage when changing to the final stage. The display stage change pattern determined in step 113AKS104 is stored in the first start winning command buffer or in the display stage variation pattern storage area in the second start winning command buffer shown in FIG.

  As described above, the display stage change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20-27 to 20-30 is for determining the display stage change pattern indicating the change in the display stage of the hold display to be notified of the hold notice effect. It is a table to be referenced. The display stage change pattern determination table is divided according to the number of reserved memories (the reserved display number of the reserved memory that is the target of the notice of the reserved notice effect) and the final display stage. Specifically, the display stage change pattern determination table is divided according to the number of holdings “4” to “2” and the final display stage “stage 1” to “stage 4”. Further, in each display stage change pattern determination table divided by the number of stored storage (holding number) and the final display stage, “big hit (16R)”, “big hit (4R)”, “losing (super reach)” or “small” Different determination ratios are assigned to the display stage change patterns set according to the final display stage for each variable display result (big hit type) such as “winning”.

  The hold display is displayed at any stage of “stage 1” to “stage 4” at the start of the hold display accompanying the start winning. In addition, the hold display can be changed to a different stage every time the shift display is performed as the hold memory is exhausted. To change. Further, the hold display may be displayed with the stage changed from the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “1” (the hold display at stage 3 is performed from the beginning instead of stage 1). When changing the stage, only the change to the upper stage is allowed (no change from the upper stage to the lower stage). May change.

  20-27 (A) to 20-28 (D), when the number of reserved memories (the number of holds) is “4” (when the reserved storage subject to notice of the hold notice effect is the hold display number “4”). Is a display stage change pattern determination table that is referred to in FIG. 2, in which a display stage change pattern indicating changes in the display stage of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “4” to “1” is set.

  FIG. 20-26A is a display stage change pattern determination table that is referred to when the final display stage is “stage 1”. As shown in FIG. 21A, when the final display stage is “stage 1”, the display stage change pattern in which the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “4” to “1” remains “stage 1”. Only PT4-1-01 (display stage change count “0”) is set, and the determination ratio assigned for each variable display result is uniformly 100%.

  20B is a display stage change pattern determination table that is referred to when the final display stage is “stage 2”. As shown in FIG. 21 (B), as the display stage change pattern, PT4-2-01 (the number of display stage changes) in which the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “4” to “1” remains “stage 2” remains unchanged. “0”) and “Stage 1” in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “4”, and “Stage 1” in any of the hold displays corresponding to the hold display numbers “3” to “1”. PT4-2-02 to 04 (display stage change count “1”) that changes from “stage 2” to “stage 2” is set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-26 (B), when the variable display result is “losing (super reach)” or “small hit”, the display stage change pattern PT4-2-01 having the display stage change count of “0”. The determination ratio assigned to is higher than in the case of other variable display results. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit (16R)” and “losing (super reach)” or “small hit”, the display stage change pattern PT4-2-02 to 04 having the display stage change count of “1”. Of these, the determination rate assigned to PT4-204 is the highest and the determination rate assigned to PT4-2-01 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit (4R)”, the determination ratio assigned to PT4-2-02 is the highest among the display stage change patterns whose display stage change count is “1”, and PT4-2. The decision rate assigned to -01 is the lowest.

  With this setting, it is suggested that when the display stage change pattern PT4-2-01 that does not change while the hold display remains “stage 2” is executed, the variable display result is likely to be “lost”. can do. In addition, the earlier the timing at which the display stage of the hold display changes from “stage 1” to “stage 2”, the more likely the variable display becomes “big hit (16R)”, “losing (super reach)”, or “small hit”. It can be suggested that as the timing is higher and the timing is later, the possibility that the variable display becomes “big hit (4R)” is higher. In addition to this, when the display stage change pattern PT4-2-01 that does not change while the hold display remains “stage 2” is executed, the variable display result is likely to be “big hit (16R)”. In this way, the determination ratio of the display stage change pattern determination table may be set. According to this, since the “Stage 2” hold display is performed from the beginning of the winning, the player can be given a sense of security. Further, the display stage change pattern determination table is determined so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit (16R)” is higher as the timing at which the display stage of the hold display changes from “stage 1” to “stage 2” is later. A ratio may be set. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be collected.

  FIG. 20C is a display stage change pattern determination table that is referred to when the final display stage is “stage 3”. As shown in FIG. 20-26 (C), as the display stage change pattern, PT4-3-01 (display stage) in which the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “4” to “1” remains “stage 3”. Change number “0”) and “Stage 1” in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “4”, and “Stage 1” in any of the hold displays corresponding to the hold display numbers “3” to “1”. PT4-3-02 to 04 (display stage change count “1”) changing from “stage 3” to “stage 3” and “stage 2” in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “4”, the hold display number PT4-3-05 to 07 (display stage change count “1”) changing from “stage 2” to “stage 3” in any of the hold displays corresponding to “3” to “1”, and the hold display number “ “Stage 1” in the hold display corresponding to “4”, PT4-3-08-10 (change from “stage 1” to “stage 2” and further from “stage 2” to “stage 3” in any of the hold displays corresponding to the stop display numbers “3” to “1”. The display stage change count “2”) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-26 (C), when the variable display result is “losing (super reach)” or “small hit”, the display stage change pattern PT4-3-01 whose display stage change count is “0”. The determination ratio assigned to is higher than that of other variable display results, and the determination ratio is not assigned to PT4-3-08-10 having the display stage change count of “2”. When the variable display result is “big hit (16R)”, “losing (super reach)” or “small hit”, the display stage change patterns PT4-3-02 to 04 with the display stage change count being “1” In each division of PT4-3-05 to 07, the determination ratio assigned to PT4-3-04 and PT4-3-07 was the highest, and assigned to PT4-3-02 and PT4-3-05, respectively. The decision rate is the lowest. When the variable display result is “big hit (16R)”, the number of changes in the display stage in which the hold display changes from “stage 1” to “stage 2” and from “stage 2” to “stage 3” is “2”. Among the display stage change patterns PT4-3-08 to 10, the determination rate assigned to PT4-3-10 is the highest and the determination rate assigned to PT4-3-08 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit (4R)”, PT4 in each division of the display stage change patterns PT4-3-02 to 04 and PT4-3-05 to 07 in which the number of display stage changes is “1”. The determination rates assigned to -3-02 and PT4-3-05 are the highest, and the determination rates assigned to PT4-3-04 and PT4-3-07 are the lowest. In addition, display stage change patterns PT4-3-08 to 10 in which the number of changes in the display stage where the hold display changes from “stage 1” to “stage 2” and from “stage 2” to “stage 3” is “2” Of these, the determination rate assigned to PT4-3-08 is the highest, and the determination rate assigned to PT4-3-10 is the lowest. That is, in each division of the display stage change patterns PT4-3-02 to 04, PT4-3-05-07, and PT4-3-08-10, when the holding number is “1”, it changes for the first time in “stage 3”. The determination ratio assigned to each of the display stage change patterns PT4-3-02, PT4-3-05, and PT4-3-08 is higher than other display stage change patterns.

  With this setting, when the display stage change pattern PT4-3-01 that does not change while the display color of the hold display remains “stage 3” is executed, the variable display result is likely to be “lost”. Can suggest that. In addition, the variable display becomes “big hit (16R)”, “losing (super reach)” as the hold display changes from “stage 1” to “stage 3” or “stage 2” to “stage 3” earlier. Or, it is possible to indicate that the possibility of “small hit” is high, and that the later the timing is, the higher the possibility that the variable display will be “big hit (4R)”. Sometimes, when it changes for the first time in “stage 3”, it can be suggested that there is a particularly high possibility that the variable display will be “big hit (probability)”. In addition to this, when the display stage change pattern PT4-3-01 that does not change while the hold display remains “stage 3” is executed, the variable display result is likely to be “big hit (16R)”. In this way, the determination ratio of the display stage change pattern determination table may be set. According to this, since the “Stage 3” hold display is performed from the beginning of the winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display stage change pattern determination table is set so that the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit (16R)” is higher as the timing at which the display stage of the hold display changes to “stage 3” is later. Also good. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be collected. In addition, the determination ratio of the display stage change pattern determination table is set so that the variable display result is more likely to be a “big hit (16R)” as the pattern changes from “stage 1” to “stage 3” at once. Also good. According to this, it is possible to exert an effect that has been upgraded in a plurality of stages (impact the player), and to improve the gaming interest.

  20D is a display stage change pattern determination table that is referred to when the final display stage is “stage 4”. As shown in FIG. 20-28 (D), PT 4-4-01 (display stage) in which the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “4” to “1” remains “stage 4” as the display stage change pattern. Change number “0”) and “Stage 1” in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “4”, and “Stage 1” in any of the hold displays corresponding to the hold display numbers “3” to “1”. PT-4-4-02 to 04 (display stage change count “1”) changing from “stage 4” to “stage 4” and “stage 2” in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “4”, the hold display number PT4-4-05 to 07 (display stage change count “1”) that changes from “stage 2” to “stage 4” in any of the hold displays corresponding to “3” to “1”, and the hold display number “ “Stage 3” in the hold display corresponding to “4”, PT4-4-08-10 (display stage change count “1”) changing from “stage 3” to “stage 4” in any of the hold displays corresponding to the stop display numbers “3” to “1”, and the hold In the hold display corresponding to the display number “4”, it is “stage 1”, and in any of the hold displays corresponding to the hold display numbers “3” to “1”, “stage 1” to “stage 2”, and “ PT4-4-11-13 (display stage change count “2”) changing from “stage 2” to “stage 4” and “stage 1” in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “4” PT4-4-14-16 (display which changes from “stage 1” to “stage 3” and further from “stage 3” to “stage 4” in any of the hold displays corresponding to the display numbers “3” to “1” Mode change count “2”) and the hold display number “4”. “Stage 1” in the display, “Stage 1” to “Stage 2” in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “3”, and “Stage 2” to “Step 2” in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “2”. PT 4-4-17 (display stage change count “3”) that changes from “stage 3” to “stage 4” in the hold display corresponding to “stage 3” and the hold display number “1” is set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-28 (D), when the variable display result is “big hit (16R)”, the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 whose display stage change count is “0” includes other variable. Compared with the case of the display result, a higher determination ratio is assigned. Further, the display mode change patterns PT4-4-02 to 04, PT4-4-05 to 07, and PT4-4-08 to 10 having a variable display result of “big hit (16R)” and the number of changes in the display stage of “1”. , The determination ratio assigned to PT4-4-04, PT4-4-07, and PT4-4-10 is the highest, and PT4-4-02, PT4-4-05, and PT4-4- The determination rate assigned to each of 08 is the lowest. When the variable display result is “big hit (16R)”, PT4 in each division of the display stage change patterns PT4-4-11-13 and PT4-4-14-16 having the display stage change count of “2”. The determination rates assigned to -4-13 and PT4-4-16 are the highest, and the determination rates assigned to PT4-4-11 and PT4-4-14 are the lowest. Further, in the display stage change pattern PT4-4-17 in which the number of changes in the display stage is “3”, the determination ratio is set higher than in the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 in which the number of changes is “0”. Furthermore, a higher determination ratio is assigned as compared with other variable display results. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit (4R)”, the display stage change patterns PT4-4-02 to 04, PT4-4-05 to 07 and PT4-4-08 having the display stage change count of “1”. -10 to 10-4, PT4-4-02, PT4-4-05, and PT4-4-08 each have the highest determination ratio, and PT4-4-04, PT4-4-07, and PT4- The determination ratio assigned to each of 4-10 is the lowest. Further, in each division of the display stage change patterns PT4-4-11 to 13 and PT4-4-14 to 16 in which the number of display stage changes is “2”, respectively, PT4-4-11 and PT4-4-14. The assigned determination ratio is the highest, and the determined ratios assigned to PT4-3-13 and PT4-4-16 are the lowest. The display stage change pattern PT4-4-17 having the display stage change count “3” has a higher determination ratio than the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 having the change count “0”. When the variable display result is “losing (super reach)” or “small hit”, since the final display mode is not “stage 4”, the display stage change patterns PT4-4-01 to 17 are assigned a determination ratio. Not.

  With such a setting, when the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 that does not change while the hold display remains at “stage 4” is executed, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit (16R)”. (Higher than “4R”). Also, the earlier the timing at which the hold display changes to “stage 4”, the higher the possibility that the variable display will be “big hit (16R)”, and the slower the timing, the more likely that the variable display will become “big hit (4R)”. It can be suggested that it is high Furthermore, when the stage of the hold display changes three times, it can be suggested that the variable display is likely to be a “big hit (16R)”. In addition to this, when the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 that does not change while the hold display remains “stage 4” is executed, the variable display result is likely to be “big hit (16R)”. In this way, the determination ratio of the display stage change pattern determination table may be set. According to this, since the “Stage 4” hold display is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the determination ratio of the display stage change pattern determination table is set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit (16R)” is higher as the timing at which the display stage of the hold display changes to “stage 4” is later. Also good. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be collected. In addition, the determination ratio of the display stage change pattern determination table is set so that the variable display result is more likely to be a “big hit (16R)” as the pattern changes from “stage 1” to “stage 4” at once. (For example, a display step change pattern in which the display step change count is “1” is more likely to be “big hit (16R)”, and the display step change count is “1”. Even so, PT4-4-02 to 04 is most likely to be the “big hit (16R)”, followed by PT4-4-05 to 07, and PT4-4-08 to 10 being the lowest. It may be) According to this, it is possible to exert an effect that has been upgraded in a plurality of stages (impact the player), and to improve the gaming interest.

  20-29 (A) to (D) are display stage change pattern determination tables that are referred to when the number of holds is "3" (when the hold storage subject to hold notice of the hold notice effect is the hold display number "3"). The display stage change pattern indicating the change in the display stage of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “3” to “1” is set. 20-30 (A) to (D) show display stage change patterns that are referred to when the number of holds is “2” (when the hold storage subject to hold notice of the hold notice effect is the hold display number “2”). In the determination table, a display stage change pattern indicating the display stage of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “2” to “1” is set.

  The setting of the determination ratio in the display stage change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 20-30 (A) to (D) is performed as described above with reference to FIGS. It has the same characteristics as the determination ratio setting in the display stage change pattern determination table shown in -28 (D). This suggests that the earlier the timing of changing to the final display stage of the hold display, the higher the possibility that the variable display will be “big hit (16R)”, and the slower the timing is, the variable display becomes “big hit (4R)”. It can be suggested that there is a high possibility. It can also be suggested that the greater the number of changes in the hold display, the higher the possibility that the variable display will be “big hit (16R)”.

  In this embodiment, the example in which the ratio of the display mode of the hold display at the final stage varies depending on the set value is shown. However, any display stage depending on the set value is also shown. The ratio of the change pattern may be different. For example, the higher the setting value, the more the setting value is changed in the order of “stage 1” → “stage 2” → “stage 3” → “stage 4”, instead of “stage 1” → “stage 3” The timing of changing to the final display stage may be made earlier as the rate of change to the upper stage is omitted and the setting value is higher. According to this, not only the display mode of the hold display at the final stage becomes but also the player's attention to the change pattern can be collected.

  Returning to the description of the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 20-25, in the process of step 113AKS102, the first start winning port designation command received in the low base state and the second start winning port designation command received in the high base state If it is determined that the display mode is neither (step 113AKS102; No), the CPU 120 for effect control determines the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display as the display mode of the first stage (step 113AKS105).

  After executing the processing of step 113AKS104 or step 113AKS105, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the first hold display portion or the second display portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 in the display mode determined in the processing of step 113AKS104 or step 113AKS105. The hold display unit additionally displays the first hold display or the second hold display, and outputs a winning sound (step 113AKS106).

  After performing the process of step 113AKS106 or when it is determined in the process of step 113AKS101 that the start winning command has not been received (step 113AKS101; No), the effect control CPU 120 has received a variation start designation command or not. Is determined (step 113AKS107). In step 113AKS107, for example, by referring to whether or not either the first variation start designation command reception flag or the second variation start designation command reception flag is set, whether or not the variation start designation command has been received is determined. What is necessary is just to judge. When it is determined that the change start designation command has not been received (step 113AKS107; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the prefetch notice setting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start designation command has been received (step 113AKS107; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 suggests (or speaks) that the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display changes. Action effect execution setting processing for effect execution setting is performed (step 113AKS108). The action effect setting process only needs to include a process for determining whether or not to execute the action effect and a process for executing the action effect. Specifically, when the variable display ends and the hold display shifts (that is, when a new variable display is executed), an action effect suggesting that the hold display is changed may be executed. When the display ends and the hold display shifts (when a new variable display is executed), the image display device 5 may execute a specific effect that displays the effect image of the shooting star toward the hold display. When the display mode of the hold display changes, a shooting star effect image (as will be described later, in the feature portion 113AK, a pentagonal image and a triangular image differ depending on the set value in addition to the star-shaped image. When the specific effect of the successful mode that hits the hold display is displayed and the display mode of the hold display does not change, a shooting star effect image (as will be described later, in the feature 113AK, a star shape) In addition to the above image, a pentagonal image and a triangular image are displayed at different ratios according to the set value), for example, a specific effect of a failure mode that disappears or deviates is executed without hitting the hold display. The Note that the display mode of the hold display changes when the specific effect of the successful mode is executed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change when the specific effect of the failed mode is executed. The action effect execution setting process in step 113AKS108 may be performed in the variable display start setting process in step S171.

  FIG. 20-31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect production execution setting process. When the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small win”, the transition to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is made after the end of the variable display, so that the action effect may not be executed. In this case, based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) or the like, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “lost”. What is necessary is just to perform an effect production execution process in the case of "losing". In addition, the action effect may be executed during variable display before shifting to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, or in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  When the action setting process shown in FIG. 20-31 is started, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on how the display mode of the hold display changes or is maintained (display mode change pattern of the hold display). In accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-32, it is determined whether or not the action effect is to be executed, and the action effect mode (whether the action effect mode is set to the success mode or the failure mode) is determined in combination. (Step 113AKS121). Note that in the low base state, a pre-reading notice effect (holding notice effect) can be executed in the first hold display, and in the high base state, a hold notice effect can be executed in the second hold display. Therefore, in step 113AKS121, in the low base state, it is determined whether or not the action effect is executed for each first hold display, and in the high base state, the action effect is executed for each second hold display. It is determined whether or not to do. In this embodiment, the action effect may be simultaneously executed for a plurality of hold displays. On the other hand, when it is desired to clarify the target of the action effect, the action effect may be executed for one hold display. In this case, for example, the effect may be preferentially executed with respect to the hold display whose display mode changes. By doing so, although the action effect of the failure mode is executed for one hold display, the display mode of the other hold display that is not the target of the action effect is changed, and the effect is not engaged. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Whether the display mode of the hold display changes may be determined from the display mode change pattern stored in the winning command buffer and the hold display number. For example, when the display mode change pattern PT4-3-06 (see FIG. 20-27 (C)) is stored in the hold display number 2, “blue” is maintained as the display mode (display color) of the hold display. (Blue → blue) is specified, and the display mode change pattern PT4-4-17 (see FIG. 20-28 (D)) is stored in the hold display number 4, the display mode of the hold display It is specified that (display color) changes from “white” to “blue” (white → blue).

  As shown in FIG. 20-32, when the action effect is executed when the display mode (display color) of the hold display is maintained (for example, “white → white”, etc.), the action effect of the failure mode is executed. When the action effect is executed when the display mode (display color) of the hold display changes (for example, “white → blue” or the like), it is determined that the action effect of the successful mode is executed. In addition, when the display mode (display color) of a hold display changes, you may change the production mode of the successful mode of an effect production according to the number of steps to change. By doing in this way, a player's expectation with respect to execution of an effect can be improved. In addition to this, the execution ratio may be different depending on the set value so that the execution ratio of the effect is different depending on the set value.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-32, the effect is more easily executed when the display mode (display color) of the hold display changes than when the display mode does not change. For example, when the display mode is maintained as “white”, the execution ratio of the action effect is 3%, whereas when the display mode changes from “white” to “blue”, the action effect is executed. The ratio is 30%. When the display mode is maintained as “blue”, the execution ratio of the action effect is 5%, whereas when the display mode changes from “blue” to “green”, the action effect is executed. The ratio is 50%. When the display mode is maintained as “green”, the execution ratio of the action effect is 0%, whereas when the display mode changes from “green” to “red”, the action effect is executed. The ratio is 70%. With such a setting, it is possible to suggest to the player that the display mode of the hold display changes when the action effect is executed.

  In addition, when the display mode of the hold display changes in three steps, the ratio of execution of the effect is higher than in the case of change in two steps, and when the display mode of the hold display changes in two steps, the change of one stage The rate at which the effect effect is executed is higher than that.

  In this embodiment, the big hit reliability increases stepwise in the order of “white” → “blue” → “green” → “red”. When the display mode is maintained as “green”, the specific effect is not executed. In other words, when the effect is executed when the display mode is “green”, the display mode always changes to “red”. In other words, when the display mode is “green”, the specific effect of the failure mode is not executed. Therefore, when the stage of the hold display (hold notice effect) is equal to or greater than the predetermined stage (here, “green” immediately before “red”), the action effect in the failure mode is not executed (the action effect in the success mode is displayed). In other words, the player's expectation is impaired and the interest of the game is prevented from deteriorating.

  Returning to FIG. 20-31, after executing the processing of step 113AKS121, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the effect in step 113AKS121, that is, whether or not the effect is performed ( Step 113AKS122). When there is no effect production execution (step 113AKS122; No), an effect production execution setting process is complete | finished. On the other hand, when the action effect is executed (step 113AKS122; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 changes the shape of the image displayed in the action effect as a type of the action effect to be executed in FIGS. “Pentagon”, “Triangle”, or “Star” is selected at the determined ratio shown (step 113AKS123), and when the variable display ends and the hold display shifts, an image of the selected shape is displayed. After setting to execute the action effect, the action effect execution setting process ends. The action effect of “pentagon” in this embodiment suggests that the setting value is “1”, and the action effect of “triangle” indicates that the setting value is “2”. The action effect of “star” suggests that the setting value is “3”. In addition to the setting value itself, for example, it is suggested that the setting value is not “1”, is a high setting value, is an even setting value, or is an odd setting value, May be suggested by each aspect. In this embodiment, the operation is the same even if the types of action effects are different, such as a success mode in which an effect image having a different shape hits the hold display as an action effect and a failure effect that does not collide (only the shape) Although the example is different, the operation (that is, the action on the hold display) may be different depending on the type of action effect. For example, the type of effect that acts on the hold display when the character appears (more specifically, the character paints the hold display), or the egg is hatched. Different types of action effects may be executed, such as an action effect of a type that cracks in itself and changes to a different mode.

  As shown in FIG. 20-33, in the characteristic portion 113AK, the determination ratio is set such that the action effect can be executed with different execution ratios (different types) at different execution ratios according to the set setting values. Therefore, different types of action effects are executed at different execution rates according to the set values, so that the effect can be enhanced. Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-33, the effect of the “star” shape is determined only when the setting value is “3”. For this reason, when the action effect having the shape of “star” is performed as the action effect, the setting value “3” is determined. On the other hand, the action effect of the “pentagon” shape and the action effect of the “triangle” shape are determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, when the effect presentation of the “pentagonal” shape or the effect presentation of the “triangular” shape is performed and when the effect presentation of the “star” shape is performed, that is, the type of the effect effect to be executed Therefore, the reliability of the suggestion is different. Therefore, it is possible to execute a kind of action effect with different degrees of reliability and enhance the effect.

  It should be noted that in the feature portion 113AK, the effect effect of the “star” shape is performed even when the failure effect is executed instead of the success effect, but the effect effect of the “star” shape is performed only when the success effect is executed. May be performed. In this case, for example, separate tables are referred to depending on whether the effect effect to be executed is a success effect or a failure effect. In the case of a failure effect, even if the set value is “3”, “star” What is necessary is just to make it refer to the table in which the determination ratio was set so that the effect of the shape would not be executed.

  20-25, after performing the process of step 113AKS108, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation designation command is a second variation start designation command (step 113AKS109). When it is determined that the received variation start designation command is not the second variation start designation command, that is, the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command (step 113AKS109; No), the effect control CPU 120 With reference to the display stage fluctuation pattern stored in the storage area of the display stage fluctuation pattern in the command buffer at the first start winning prize, each first hold display is changed or maintained according to the display stage fluctuation pattern associated with each. In the first hold display section of the image display device 5, the hold display of the hold display number of the hold display number “1” is deleted, and the display positions of the first hold displays corresponding to “2” to “4” are displayed. Move (shift) rightward one by one (step 113AKS110). In step 113AKS110, the effect effect set in step 113AKS108 is performed before the display mode of a hold display changes.

  After executing the processing of step 113AKS110, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored content of the hold display number “1” in the first start winning command buffer and corresponds to the hold display numbers “2” to “4”. The stored contents are shifted one by one (step 113AKS111), and the prefetch notice setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step 113AKS109, when it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 113AKS109; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display stage variation pattern in the second start winning prize command buffer. With reference to the display stage fluctuation pattern stored in the storage area, each second hold display is changed or maintained according to the display stage change pattern associated with each, and in the second hold display section of the image display device 5, The hold display of the hold display number of the hold display number “1” is erased, and the display positions of the second hold displays corresponding to “2” to “4” are moved (shifted) to the left one by one (step) 113AKS112). In step 113AKS112, the effect effect set in step 113AKS108 is performed before the display mode of a hold display changes.

  After executing the processing of step 113AKS112, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored content of the hold display number “1” in the second start winning command buffer and corresponds to the hold display numbers “2” to “4”. The stored contents are shifted one by one (step 113AKS113), and the prefetch notice setting process is terminated. Thereby, the pre-reading notice effect and the action effect in the feature part 113AK are executed.

  20-34 shows an example of the effect operation when the action effect and the prefetch notice effect are executed. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the set value is “3”. As shown in FIG. 20-34 (A), variable display is being executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5. In the first hold display section, first hold displays H1 to H4 corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” are displayed. Among these hold displays H1 to H4, the hold display H2 is displayed in “blue”, and the hold displays H1, H3, and H4 are displayed in “white” which is a normal mode. The hold display H2 is a hold display based on a hold memory whose variation pattern is Super Reach A (losing), and the hold display H4 is a hold based on a hold memory whose variation pattern determination result is Super Reach B (big hit). It is assumed that it is a display. When it is determined that the action effect of the shape of “star” is executed with respect to the first hold display H2 of FIG. 20-34 (A), as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B). A specific effect is performed in which a shooting star effect image 113AK001 flies toward the first hold display H2 of the color "blue". Here, an example is shown in which a specific effect of a failure mode that disappears before the shooting star effect image 113AK001 collides with the first hold display H2. As shown in the figure, the variable display being executed in FIG. 20-34 (A) is finished, and on the display screen of the image display device 5, the lost symbol is displayed as a variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (C), the first hold display H2 is shifted to the right side, but the display color remains “blue”. In FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), The variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed on the hold display portion is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (D), when it is decided to execute the effect of the shape of “star” on the first hold display H4, the display color is “white”. An effect effect in which a shooting star effect image 113AK002 flies toward the first hold display H4 is executed. Here, an example is shown in which an effect effect of a successful mode in which a shooting star effect image 113AK002 hits the first hold display H4 and changes the display mode of the hold display is executed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (E), the display color of the first hold display H4 changes from “white” (stage 1) to “green” (stage 3) according to the display mode change pattern PT4-4-14. It has changed. And when it is determined to perform the effect of the shape of “star” on the first hold display H4 of FIG. 20-34 (F), as shown in FIG. 20-34 (G). Then, the specific effect in which the shooting star effect image 113AK002 flies toward the first hold display H4 with the display color “green” is executed. Here, an example is shown in which a specific effect of a successful mode in which a shooting star effect image 113AK002 hits the first hold display H4 and changes the display mode of the hold display is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (H), the first hold display H4 is shifted to the right and the display color is changed to “red”. As described above, when the specific effect is executed for the hold display whose display color is “green”, the specific effect of the successful mode is always executed and the display color is changed to “red”. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being lost and the interest of the game from deteriorating.

(Modification of feature 113AK)
In the above embodiment, the ratio of the display mode of the final stage of the hold display is different depending on which setting value is set, and the display mode of the hold display (the display of the final stage) Although an example in which setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value) is performed is shown as an example, this is an example. For example, when the display mode at the final stage is “blue” and the super-reach (story super-reach) develops a story as an effect performed during the variable display corresponding to the hold, the super-reach (battle) that performs the battle The content of the suggestion may be different in the case of Super Reach). Furthermore, even when the story super reach is performed, the suggested contents differ depending on whether the display mode of the final stage of the hold display corresponding to the variable display is “blue” or “green”. You may do it. That is, setting suggestion of different contents may be performed at different execution ratios depending on the combination of the display mode of the hold display at the final stage and the effect during the variable display corresponding to the hold display. According to this, a player's attention can be gathered with respect to the combination of the presentation performed for the hold display and the subsequent change, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition to the pre-reading notice effect (holding notice effect) in the above embodiment, for example, a hold display is displayed with a character having a different color and type, and the white character A hold has a low jackpot expectation, and the white character B's hold suggests that although the jackpot expectation is low, it is a high setting, red character A's hold has a high jackpot expectation, red character B's hold has a high jackpot expectation, and a higher setting. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types and colors of characters in one hold display, such as suggesting, and thereby making it possible to notify the big hit expectation and the high setting suggestion, respectively. According to this, since the notification of the big hit expectation and the setting suggestion are clearly notified to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which a pre-reading notice effect (hold notice effect) that changes the display mode of the hold display stepwise is shown, but this is an example. In addition to this, for example, active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be performed, and the display mode of the active display may be changed (active change effect may be executed). In this case, it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the active display, and in the case of changing, for example, in the process of step 113AKS103, the display mode of the active display is determined as the final stage to be changed and is not changed. Therefore, the display mode of the hold display may be determined as the final stage. When executing the active change effect, the execution ratio, the change pattern that sequentially changes from the hold display, the execution ratio of the action effect, and the like may be changed according to the set value. In addition, when the display mode of the final stage is “red” at the stage of the hold display and when the display mode changes from the hold display to “red” in the active display, for example, “red” is displayed in the active display. ”Is higher, the big hit expectation is higher, even if the display mode is the same, the big hit expectation is different between the display in the hold display and the active display. Also good. Furthermore, depending on the set value, when the active display is “red”, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher than the case of “red” which is the final display mode at the hold display stage, There may be the opposite case.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 113AK)
With respect to the above-described feature portion 113AK, a gaming machine that can change settings related to gaming has been disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 113AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production,
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
One of setting values (for example, any one of setting values 1 to 3) can be set from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.
Hold storage means (for example, the CPU 103 that stores the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102) capable of storing information relating to variable display as the hold storage information;
Holding display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for displaying the hold display),
The hold display means can display the hold display in any one of a plurality of display modes according to a set value that has been set (for example, display of a hold display at the final stage according to a set value) The ratio of which aspect will be different, etc.)
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of means 2 relating to the feature 113AK,
The plurality of display modes include a first mode (for example, a specific mode) that suggests a set value that has been set, and a second mode (for example, a normal mode) that does not suggest a set value that has been set,
The on-hold display means can display the on-hold display of the display mode of either the first mode or the second mode at a different rate depending on a set value that has been set (for example, the set value is set to any value) Depending on whether or not the execution rate of the pre-reading notice effect is different)
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 113AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature 113AK,
The hold display means can display the hold display so that the advantage differs according to the set value even if the hold display is in the same mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display in the final stage) , Even if they are the same, the expected value of jackpot varies depending on the setting value)
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 113AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature 113AK,
It is possible to suggest a set value set by a combination of the display mode of the hold display displayed by the hold display unit and the type of effect executed during variable display (for example, the display mode of the hold display at the final stage) And setting suggestions for different contents depending on the combination with the presentation during variable display corresponding to the hold display, etc.)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 113AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature 113AK,
Further comprising action effect means for changing the display mode of the hold display by causing a predetermined image to act on the hold display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the action effect);
The action effect means is capable of executing any kind of the effect effects among a plurality of types of effect effects according to the set value that is set (for example, different execution ratios depending on the set value that is set) In different shapes (different types), etc.)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic portion 113AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of means 6 relating to the feature 113AK,
The hold display means has a first display mode indicating that an expectation controlled to the advantageous state is a first expectation, an expectation controlled to the advantageous state is the first expectation, and A second display mode that suggests a set value that is set; a third display mode that indicates that the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state is a second degree of expectation that is higher than the first degree of expectation; and the advantage The hold display can be displayed in any one of the display modes of the fourth display mode in which the expected level controlled by the state is the second expected level and suggests the set set value (for example, 1 Multiple types of characters and colors in one hold display, each with notification of the jackpot expectation and high setting suggestions, etc.)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 according to the characteristic portion 113AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 related to the characteristic portion 113AK,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, initial appearance effect) (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the CPU 120 for effect control) ) And
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by a special initial appearance) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by an even initial appearance) can be executed,
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 By executing step 121IWS313, the initial appearance effect by the special initial appearance is not executed)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 6 according to the characteristic portion 113AK.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding the feature 114AK)
Next, the feature part 114AK of the present embodiment will be described. 20-35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 114AK. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is “lost”, for example, by reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11. Is determined (step S521). At this time, when it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S521; Yes), the specified variation pattern is decorated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command, for example. It is determined whether or not the pattern variable display mode is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of “non-reach” (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, a random number value for determining a left determined symbol updated by a random counter for production provided in a predetermined area (production control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 is shown. By extracting numerical data and referring to the left determined symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is displayed. The left fixed decorative pattern to be stopped is determined. Next, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. From the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating random values for determining left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the left and right prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 are prepared. By referring to the fixed symbol determination table, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols. Determine the same decorative design. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for production is extracted, and a medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S521; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or any other case. Determination is made (step S525). When it is determined that it is “small hit” (step S525; Yes), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “small hit”, for example, an opening chance is determined (step S527). . As an example, in response to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbol constituting one of a plurality of types of opening chances is determined. Determine the combination of decorative designs. In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is only necessary to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that constitute one of the opening chance eyes by referring to.

  When it is determined in step S525 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “small hit” (step S525; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S526). As an example, in the process of step S526, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determination symbol updated by a random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the display is stopped and aligned in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative design having the same design number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is determined as a final decorative symbol. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, any one of the multiple types of normal symbols is selected and determined as a definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected, and a definite ornament symbol that constitutes a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. You just have to decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative symbol of a non-probable variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probable variation state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that control is made to the probability variation state is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  After executing any one of steps S523, S524, S526, and S527, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined effect execution setting process (step 114AKS001). In the predetermined effect in the feature portion 114AK, for example, a battle effect (common effect) in which two characters (the main character and the enemy character) perform a battle is performed, and the effect result is displayed. In addition, in the predetermined effect in the feature part 114AK, setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value) may be performed after execution of the common effect. The common performance includes a successful performance in which the main character wins (if the execution result is successful) and a failure production in which the main character is defeated (if the execution result is unsuccessful). (Including cases of great success), when success production is performed (that is, when success is displayed as the production result of common production), when failure production is performed (that is, failure as the production result of common production) Setting suggestion is performed at a higher rate. In the predetermined effect execution setting process in step 114AKS001, the common effect, its effect result, and setting suggestion execution setting are performed (that is, the common effect and the setting suggestion are collectively referred to as a predetermined effect). The common performance is the same for the successful performance and the failure performance, and the performance results are different. In addition, in this embodiment, although the example which performs a battle effect as a common effect is shown, it is not restricted to a battle effect, for example, the effect which draws a lottery and displays a display result, such as success or failure, fishing It is also possible to display the success or failure depending on whether or not the fishing can be performed.

  20-36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the predetermined effect execution setting process. In the predetermined effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-36, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the common effect (step 114AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 114AKS002, based on the variable display result, whether or not to execute the common effect is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. The common effect in this embodiment is an effect performed during variable display, and when it is executed, it is an effect that has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than when it is not executed. In addition, for example, any one of a plurality of timings may be determined as the execution timing in the case of execution so that the expectation degree becomes higher as the timing at which the common effect is executed is later.

  Following the process of step 114AKS002, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the execution of the common effect is determined to be “present” in step 114AKS002 (step 114AKS003). When execution of the common effect is determined to be “none” (step 114AKS003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined effect execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution of the common effect is “present” (step 114AKS003; Yes), the execution result of the common effect is determined (step 114AKS004). Specifically, in the process of step 114AKS004, the variation pattern is identified based on the variation pattern designation command, and the execution result of the common effect is “successful” based on the determined variation pattern based on the identified variation pattern. , “Failure” or “Great success”. As shown in FIG. 20-38, when the execution result of the common effect is “success” or “great success”, the ratio that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than the case of “failure”. It is high. In addition, when the execution result of the common performance is “very successful”, a determination ratio is assigned so that the super reach or more is determined. Note that the common effect in which the execution result is “big success” may be determined only when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  After executing the process of step 114AKS004, the output control CPU 120 determines the type of common effect to be executed (step 114AKS006). Specifically, in the process of step 114AKS006, based on the execution result of the common effect determined in step 114AKS004, the types of common effects are “type A”, “type B”, “ It is determined as one of “Category C”. In this embodiment, the common effect of “Type A” is the character A as the main character displayed in the battle effect, and the common effect of “Type B” is the character B as the main character displayed in the battle effect. The common effect of “type C” is the character C as the main character displayed in the battle effect. In this way, the type of character displayed in the battle effect is not different, but the battle effect is performed in the common effect of “Type A”, and the effect of performing the lottery is performed in the common effect of “Type B”. In the “Category C” common effect, each effect itself may be different, such as an effect of fishing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-39, in the characteristic portion 114AK, the execution result of the common effect depends on which type of common effect of “type A”, “type B”, and “type C” is executed. The determination ratio is set so that the ratio of “success”, “failure”, or “great success” is different. Specifically, in the characteristic portion 114AK, the ratio of which result of the execution of the common effect is different according to the type of the common effect to be executed, and the execution result of the common effect is “success” or “ In the case of “success”, the rate of execution is higher in the order of “type C” <“type B” <“type A”. In addition, since the ratio that the execution result of the common effect is “great success” is lower than the other execution results, for example, the common effect of “type C” having the lowest ratio that the execution result is “success” is executed. In such a case, the ratio of the execution result to “great success” may be higher than that in the case where the common effect of “type A” or “type B” is executed. According to this, even if the common effect of “Type C” with a high ratio of “failure” as the execution result is performed, the possibility of “Great success” is higher than that of other types of common effects. Because it is expensive, it can give the player a sense of expectation.

  Returning to FIG. 20-36, after executing the process of step 114AKS006, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether the execution result of the common effect determined in step 114AKS004 is “success” or “great success”. (Step 114AKS007). When the execution result of the common effect is neither “success” nor “great success”, ie, “failure” (step 114AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when the execution result of the common effect is “success” or “great success” (step 114AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion execution setting process for performing setting suggestion execution ( Step 114AKS008), the predetermined effect execution setting process is terminated.

  20-40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process executed in step 114AKS008 in FIG. 20-36. In the setting suggestion execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-40, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value) is executed (step 114AKS111). Specifically, in the process of step 114AKS111, based on the variable display result, the presence / absence of setting suggestion is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. The setting suggestion in the feature part 114AK is an effect that can be displayed in accordance with the execution result of the common effect when the execution result of the common effect is “success” or “great success”. Is not executed. Therefore, when the execution result of the common effect is “success” or “great success”, it is possible to attract more players' interest and enhance the effect of the effect. Even if the execution result of the common effect is “failure”, the setting suggestion may be executed at a lower rate than the case of “success” or “great success”. As shown in FIG. 20-41, in the feature portion 114AK, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the setting suggestion ratio is higher than in the case of “losing”. Therefore, not only the setting suggestion content indicating which setting value is suggested by the setting suggestion but also the player's attention on whether or not the setting suggestion is executed can be gathered. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion may not be executed when the execution result of the common effect is “success” or “great success”, but the execution result of the common effect is “success”. Alternatively, setting suggestion may be executed whenever “very successful”. In this case, for example, the process of step 114AKS007 shown in FIG. 20-36 is not executed, and in the process of step 114AKS008, instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-41, for example, “success” or “great success” Whether or not the setting suggestion is executed may be determined by referring to a table set to a determination ratio of 100% for “executed” and 100% for “not executed”. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the example which performs the setting suggestion execution setting after performing the execution setting of the common effect was shown, the execution setting of the common effect may be performed after performing the setting suggestion execution setting. . In this case, for example, when the setting suggestion is executed, the success effect is set as the common effect, and when the setting suggestion is not executed, the failure effect is set as the common effect.

  Returning to FIG. 20-40, after executing the process of step 114AKS111, whether or not the production control CPU 120 has determined to execute the setting suggestion in step 114AKS111, that is, whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion was determined to be “present”. It is determined whether or not (step 114AKS112). When it is determined that the execution of the setting suggestion is “none” (step 114AKS112; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution of setting suggestion is “present” (step 114AKS112; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines the execution mode of setting suggestion (step 114AKS113), and then the setting suggestion execution setting process. Exit. Specifically, in the process of step 114AKS113, the determination shown in FIG. 20-42 (A) or FIG. 20-42 (B) is performed depending on whether the execution result of the common effect is “success” or “great success”. According to the ratio, any execution mode of setting suggestion mode 1 to setting suggestion mode 3 is determined according to the set value. The setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 1” in this embodiment suggests that the setting value is “1”, and the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 2” indicates that the setting value is “2”. The setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” suggests that the setting value is “3”. In addition to the setting value itself, for example, it is suggested that the setting value is not “1”, is a high setting value, is an even setting value, or is an odd setting value, May be suggested by each aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 20-42, in the feature part 114AK, the determination ratio is set so that the setting suggestion can be executed in different modes at different execution ratios depending on the set value that has been set. Therefore, different types of setting suggestions are executed at different execution ratios according to the setting value, so that it is possible to enhance the effect. Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-42, the setting suggestion of the “setting suggestion aspect 3” is determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, when the setting suggestion “setting suggestion mode 3” is performed, it is determined that the setting value is “3”. On the other hand, the setting suggestions of “setting suggestion mode 1” and “setting suggestion mode 2” are determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, the reliability of the suggestion when the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 1” or the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 2” is performed and when the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 3” is performed. Are different. That is, the reliability of the suggestion varies depending on the setting suggestion mode to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute setting suggestions of different types of reliability and enhance the effect of production. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (B), when the execution result of the common effect is “great success”, the execution result of the common effect is “successful” as shown in FIG. 20-42 (A). The decision ratio is assigned so that the reliability of the suggestion is higher than the case of. Specifically, when the execution result of the common effect is “great success” and the set value is “1”, the execution result of the common effect is “success” and the set value is “1”. The determination ratio is set so that the setting suggestion of the “setting suggestion aspect 1” is executed as a ratio. Further, when the execution result of the common effect is “great success” and the setting value is “2”, the execution result of the common effect is “success” and the rate is higher than the case where the setting value is “2”. The determination ratio is set so that the setting suggestion of the “setting suggestion aspect 2” is executed. That is, in the feature part 114AK, the reliability of the suggested setting value is higher when the execution result of the common effect is “successful” than when it is “successful”. Therefore, since the reliability of the suggestion varies depending on the execution result of the common performance, the performance effect can be enhanced. When setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” is performed, it is determined that the setting value is “3” regardless of the execution result of the common effect. In the form, the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” is higher in the case where the execution result of the common effect is “great success” than in the case of “success”. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the execution result of the common performance is “great success”.

  In addition, when the execution result of the common effect is “success” and when the execution result of the common effect is “successful”, for example, “success” Depending on the execution result of the common effects, such as displaying the setting suggestion larger than the case where it becomes, a different display color, outputting a special sound, etc., the same “setting suggestion aspect 1” to “setting suggestion aspect” 3 ”may be a different display mode. In addition, for example, when the execution result of the common effect is “success” and when the execution result of the common effect is “very successful”, the reliability of the setting suggestion is displayed respectively. Alternatively, when the execution result of the common effect is “successful”, a display indicating that the reliability is higher than when the execution result of the common effect is “success” may be displayed. .

  Returning to FIG. 20-35, after performing the process of step 114AKS001, the CPU 120 for effect control performs other effect execution settings (step S531). For example, a presentation effect or game effect in which a predetermined sound effect (for example, alarm sound, chime sound, siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at a predetermined timing at the start or during execution of variable display. Immediate notification (deterministic) that the variable display result will be a “big hit” by executing a certain aspect of the effect in which the flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines. The effect of the one-shot notification mode to be notified) may be executed. Alternatively, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” may be executed as the changing notice effect.

  As another example, in the process of step S531, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, for example, a setting may be made to perform a predetermined effect for liveliness. More specifically, it is only necessary to be able to execute an effect in a predetermined mode such as an effect in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 shines or an effect in which a predetermined effect image to be a mini character is displayed.

  Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S532). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of special-figure variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. After executing the process of step S532, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (step S533). Subsequently, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is performed (step S534). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the special-figure variation effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S532 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S535), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIGS. 20-43 is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a common production | presentation and a setting suggestion (suggestion production). When variable display is started as shown in FIG. 20-43 (A) and the execution period of the common effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (B), the character A and the enemy character are displayed as the common effect of type A. A battle effect 114AK001 for performing a battle is performed. The common effect execution period is set at step 114AKS001 in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (C), when the battle effect progresses and becomes a successful effect, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (D-1), character A is the execution result of the common effect. A message of “Success!” Is displayed, and a suggestion display 114AK003 such as “Setting 3 !?” is displayed as a setting suggestion. In the example shown in the figure, an example in which the setting suggestion “setting suggestion mode 3” is performed is shown. On the other hand, in the case of a failure effect, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (D-2), as the execution result of the common effect, character A is defeated and a message “failure!” Is displayed. Note that, when the failure effect is executed, the setting suggestion is not executed, and thus the suggestion display 114AK003 is not performed in the illustrated example. When the execution result of the common effect is “great success”, a message display indicating “great success” may be performed as in FIG. 20-43 (D-1). Unlike the case of “success”, it may be displayed in a manner that is more easily recognized by the player, for example, larger than the case of “success”. Further, when the execution result of the common effect is “great success”, the setting suggestion may be performed in a mode that is easier to recognize by the player in a mode different from FIG. 20-43 (D-1). .

(Modification of the feature 114AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-42, when setting suggestion is performed depending on whether the execution result of the common effect is “success” or “great success”, the setting of the same mode is performed. Although the suggestion has a different degree of reliability, this is just an example. In addition to this, for example, when setting suggestion is performed according to the type of common performance to be executed, the reliability of the suggestion may be different. In this case, for example, in step 114AKS113 of FIG. 20-40, the execution mode of setting suggestion may be determined according to the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 20-44 (A) to (C) in accordance with the type of common effect. “Setting suggestion mode 1” to “setting suggestion mode 3” shown in FIGS. 20-44 suggest that the setting values are “1” to “3”, respectively, as in the above embodiment. . As shown in FIG. 20-44, in this modification, when the type of common performance to be executed is type A, the reliability is higher when setting suggestion is executed than when type B is used. The decision rate is set as follows. Further, when the type of common effect to be executed is type B, the determination ratio is set so that the reliability is higher when setting suggestion is executed than when type C is used. That is, when setting suggestions are made in the order of type A> type B> type C, the reliability is low. As described above, when the setting suggestion is made according to the type of the common effect to be executed, the reliability of the suggestion is made different so as to attract the player's attention to the type of the common effect to be executed. It is possible to enhance the production effect.

  Moreover, in this modification, according to the type of the common effect to be executed, when the setting suggestion is performed, the reliability of the suggestion is different. When setting suggestion is performed, the suggestion content may be different. For example, if the type of the common effect performed is type A, the setting value suggests whether the setting value is any of “1” to “3”, that is, the setting value itself is suggested, and the common effect performed. If type is type B, the setting suggestion suggests a probability of high setting (for example, suggesting the probability of high setting by the number of stars), and the type of common effect performed is type C. For example, the setting suggestion may indicate that the setting value is not “1”, an odd setting value, an even setting value, or the like. In this way, when the setting suggestion is made according to the type of the common effect to be executed, by making the suggestion content different, it is possible to visually recognize various setting suggestions and enhance the effect. Can do.

(Explanation of means related to the feature 114AK)
With respect to the above-described feature portion 114AK, conventionally, as a gaming machine capable of changing settings relating to a game, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 114AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production,
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
One of setting values (for example, any one of setting values 1 to 3) can be set from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.
Suggesting effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes setting suggestion in accordance with the set setting value) capable of executing the suggestion effect at different ratios in accordance with the set setting value,
The suggestion effect execution means does not execute the suggestion effect after the effect result of the common effect becomes the first result, and executes the suggestion effect after the effect result of the common effect becomes the second result (for example, If the execution result of the common performance is “failure”, the setting suggestion is not executed, and if it is “successful”
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature 114AK,
The suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect in a mode in which the reliability of the suggested setting value is higher than when the effect result of the common effect is the third result than when the result of the common effect is the second result. (For example, when the execution result of the common performance is “successful”, the reliability of the suggestion when the setting suggestion is performed is higher than the case of “success”)
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 114AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature 114AK,
There are a plurality of types of the common effects, and the proportion of the result of the common effects varies depending on which type of the common effects is executed (for example, depending on the type of the common effects to be executed). Etc., and the ratio of which result of common performance will be different)
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 114AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature 114AK,
There are a plurality of types of common effects, and depending on which type of the common effects is executed, the reliability of the setting value suggested when the suggested effects are executed is different (for example, the common effects to be executed). Depending on the type of the setting suggestion, the reliability of the suggestion varies)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 114AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature 114AK,
There are a plurality of types of the common effects, and depending on which type of the common effects is executed, the contents suggested when the suggested effects are executed are different.
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic portion 114AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 according to the feature 114AK,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, initial appearance effect) (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the CPU 120 for effect control) ) And
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by a special initial appearance) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by an even initial appearance) can be executed,
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 By executing step 121IWS313, the initial appearance effect by the special initial appearance is not executed)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 5 according to the characteristic portion 114AK.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding the feature 115AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 115AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing executed by the feature unit 115AK. As shown in the drawing, in the variable display start setting process executed in the feature part 115AK, the predetermined effect execution setting process in step 114AKS001 in the variable display start setting process executed in the feature part 114AK (see FIG. 20-35). Instead, a setting suggestion execution setting process is executed in step 115AKS001. The other processes are the same as the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 114AK, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The setting suggestion execution setting process in step 115AKS001 is a process for performing execution setting of setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value), and the setting suggestion in the feature portion 115AK is an effect performed during variable display. This is an effect that is executed at a higher rate when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when it is time to end the game, than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 20-46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process performed in step 115AKS001 in FIG. 20-45. In the setting suggestion execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-45, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion is executed (step 115AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 115AKS002, based on whether or not the variable display to be executed is a variable display that satisfies the end condition of the short time state, that is, whether or not it is a variable display of the short time end times, FIG. Whether or not the setting suggestion is executed is determined according to the determination ratio shown in -47. Time-short end times are the final times of the special figure game set at the end of the big hit gaming state (for example, if the set number is “100”, the 100th variable display after the big hit ends) Say. In step 115AKS002, whether or not the variable display at the time reduction end time is coincident is made by comparing the count value counted each time the variable display is executed in the time reduction state with the number set at the end of the big hit. (If the time-short count value set at the end of jackpot is subtracted at the end of variable display, whether the time-short count value is “1” or not) From this, it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is a short time end time). When the variable display of the time-short end times is completed, the time-short flag indicating that the time is short and the count value (including the number of times set at the time of the big hit end) are cleared.

  As shown in FIG. 20-47, in the feature portion 115AK, when the variable display of the execution target is the variable display of the short-time end times, it is higher than when it is not (including the normal state instead of the short-time state) It is decided to execute the setting suggestion by the ratio. Therefore, the player's attention can be gathered with respect to the variable display of the short time end times, and the production effect can be enhanced. The example shown in the figure shows an example in which setting suggestion is executed even when the variable display of the execution target is not the short-time end times (including the case of the normal state), but only when it is the short-time end times. It may be decided to execute the setting suggestion. Further, in the processing of step 115AKS002, the execution rate of setting suggestion may be different depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” in addition to whether or not the variable display of the short time end is displayed. For example, when the variable display of the short-time end times is variable and the variable display result is “big hit”> The variable display of the short-time end times is variable and the variable display result is “lost”> The variable display of the short-time end times is not If the variable display result is “big hit”> the variable display result is “losing” instead of the variable display at the end of the short time, the setting suggestion execution ratio may be lower. Further, instead of the variable display result, the execution rate of setting suggestion may be different according to the set value that has been set. For example, when the variable display is set to “short-time end times” and the set value is “3”> the variable display is set to “short-time end times”, and when the set value is “2”> the variable display is set to “short time end times” When the value is “1”> When the setting value is “3” instead of the variable display of the time-short end times> When the setting value is “2” instead of the variable display of the time-short end times> The setting suggestion execution ratio may be lower in the order such as when the setting value is “1” instead of the variable display. That is, setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate depending on the set value, in addition to whether or not the variable display is short-time end times. Further, the setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate depending on the set value regardless of whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display at the short time end.

  Returning to FIG. 20-46, after executing the processing of step 115AKS002, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the setting suggestion in step 115AKS002, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion is executed ( Step 115AKS003). If there is no setting suggestion execution (step 115AKS003; No), the setting suggestion execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the setting suggestion execution is present (step 115AKS003; Yes), the production control CPU 120 is a variable display in which the execution target variable display satisfies the short-time end condition, that is, the short-time end variable display. (Step 115AKS004). When it is not variable display of the short-time end times (including the case of normal state) (step 115AKS004; No), the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal table shown in FIG. 20-48 (A) as a reference table. (Step 115AKS005). On the other hand, in the case of variable display at the short time end time (step 115AKS004; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects the special table shown in FIG. 20-48 (B) as a reference table (step 115AKS005).

  The normal table and the special table shown in FIG. 20-48 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the execution mode of the setting suggestion (to perform the process of step 115AKS007 described later). As the execution mode of suggestion, a determination ratio is assigned to each of “setting suggestion mode 1” to “setting suggestion mode 3” according to a set value that is set. The setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 1” in this embodiment suggests that the setting value is “1”, and the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 2” indicates that the setting value is “2”. The setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” suggests that the setting value is “3”. In addition to the setting value itself, for example, it is suggested that the setting value is not “1”, is a high setting value, is an even setting value, or is an odd setting value, May be suggested by each aspect.

  In the normal table shown in FIG. 20-48 (A), as shown in the figure, the determination ratio is set so that the setting suggestion of the aspect of “setting suggestion aspect 3” is determined only when the setting value is “3”. Has been. Therefore, when the setting suggestion “setting suggestion mode 3” is performed, it is determined that the setting value is “3”. On the other hand, the setting suggestions of “setting suggestion mode 1” and “setting suggestion mode 2” are determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, the reliability of the suggestion when the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 1” or the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 2” is performed and when the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 3” is performed. Are different. That is, the reliability of the suggestion varies depending on the setting suggestion mode to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute setting suggestions of different types of reliability and enhance the effect of production. On the other hand, in the special table shown in FIG. 20-48 (B), as shown in the figure, unlike the normal table, the setting suggestions of the “setting suggestion mode 3” are set values “1” to “3”. The determination ratio is set so that it can be determined in either case. Therefore, in the variable display of the short-time end times, the setting suggestion indicating that the set value is “3” (that is, in the high setting) than in the case where the variable display of the short-time end times is not (including the normal state). There is a high percentage of setting suggestions that suggest that there is. On the other hand, in the variable display of the short-time end times, the setting suggestion of the mode of “setting suggestion mode 3” can be determined by any of the setting values “1” to “3”. The reliability of the suggestion is lower than in the case of not displaying (including the case of normal state). Here, when the variable display at the time-shortening end time is finished, the time-shortening state is finished. Therefore, the player often ends the game, assuming that the advantageous state is ended by ending the variable display at the short end time. In the characteristic portion 115AK, the setting suggestion that suggests a high setting is executed at a higher rate in the variable display of the short-time end times than in the variable display other than the short-time end times, so that the player's game is continued. And the operating rate can be improved. In addition, although the reliability of the suggestion is low, it is suggested that the setting value is “3” in the variable display of the short-time end times than in the case where the variable display of the short-time end times is not (including the normal state). Since there is a high ratio of setting suggestions to be made (that is, setting suggestions that suggest a high setting), it becomes easier for players to recognize setting suggestions that suggest a high setting, and the game can be continued. It is possible to improve the operating rate.

  Returning to FIG. 20-46, after executing the processing of step 115AKS005 or step 115AKS006, the CPU 120 for effect control is executed according to the set value based on the table selected in step 115AKS005 or step 115AKS006. Is determined (step 115AKS007), and the setting suggestion execution setting process is terminated. In the process of step 115AKS007, the setting suggestion execution mode may be determined and the execution timing of the setting suggestion (including the setting suggestion execution period) may be determined. As described above, when the setting suggestion execution setting process in step 115AKS001 is performed and the setting suggestion execution setting is performed, the setting suggestion is executed in the setting suggestion execution period in the variable display effect process in step S172. Note that, for example, the setting suggestion mode in the special table shown in FIG. 20-48 (B) is executed at the time-short end times than the setting suggestion mode in the normal table shown in FIG. 20-48 (A). The setting suggestion may be performed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the setting suggestion that is performed at times other than the short-time end times (including the case of the normal state). That is, the setting suggestion mode 1 determined based on the special table is displayed larger, the luminance is higher, or the output volume is larger than the setting suggestion mode 1 determined based on the normal table. The player may be easily recognized. According to this, continuation of a game can be promoted and an operating rate can be improved.

  20-49 is a diagram illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect operation performed in the feature unit 115AK. As shown in FIG. 20-49 (A), at the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of variable displays for which the time reduction control is performed is notified (in the example shown, 20 times). When the big hit gaming state ends and variable display is started, setting suggestion is performed as shown in FIG. 20-49 (B). In the example shown in FIG. 20-49 (B), since the variable display is not the 20th variable display, which is the short-time end, the normal table is selected in step 115AKS005 in FIG. 20-46, and based on the normal table. The setting of the mode determined in this way is suggested. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (C), when the 20th variable display, which is the time-shortening end time, is started, a special table is selected in step 115AKS006, and is determined based on the special table. Setting suggestions are made. In the example shown in FIG. 20-49 (B), the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 2” is performed, and in the example shown in FIG. 20-49 (C), the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” is performed. It shows the case where it was broken. Further, in the example shown in the figure, the setting suggestion executed at the short time end times has a larger setting suggestion display size than the setting suggestion performed at times other than the short time end times (including the case of the normal state), and A case where the display frame is executed in a manner that is easily recognized by the player by changing the manner of the display frame is shown. In addition, as described above, the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” can be performed at the time-short end times regardless of the set value (since it is performed at a higher rate than other than the time-short end times). In the example shown in FIG. 20-49 (C), the case where the setting suggestion “setting suggestion mode 3” is performed is shown. Thus, the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3”, that is, the setting suggestion indicating that the setting is high, is performed in the variable display of the time-saving end times, so that the game is finished at the end of the time-saving state. It is possible to suppress such a situation and favorably continue the game. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which setting suggestion can be executed at times other than the short-time end times (including a case in a normal state), but setting suggestions may not be executed at times other than the short-time end times. . Further, for example, the execution rate of setting suggestion may be increased as the display is closer to the variable display at the short time end. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-47, an example in which setting suggestion may not be executed in the variable display of the short time end times is shown. It may be performed. In addition, setting suggestion may be performed regardless of whether or not the time is short. Note that, for example, game data for several days such as 5 days (number of fluctuations, number of jackpots, number of payout balls, ratio of consecutive games, etc.) is stored, and setting suggestion to be executed on that day based on the stored game data The execution mode and execution ratio may be different. Specifically, when the set jackpot probability is 1/300, when the jackpot probability stored as the game data for 5 days is 1/500, the setting suggestion ratio may be increased. Moreover, when the number of payout balls on the previous day is 10,000 balls or more, the setting suggestion of the mode that suggests the high setting may be executed at a high rate even if the setting is low.

(Modification of feature 115AK)
In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the execution target is the variable display of the short-time end times, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the case of the variable display other than the short-time end times. Is an example. In the characteristic portion 115AK, if a suggestion effect that suggests a high setting is executed at a high rate at a timing at which the player finishes the game (a timing at which a predetermined condition is satisfied), the variable of the short-time end times can be changed. The timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied is not limited to the timing during display, and may be any timing. For example, the timing at the end of consecutive consecutive jackpots, the timing when the player's usage amount reaches a specific amount such as 10,000 yen, a predetermined variable display number (for example, 100 times after the end of the probable change state) At the time of reaching the game, the timing at which the simultaneous production performed at the entire designated gaming machine in the game hall is completed, the timing of switching from the background showing the probabilistic latent state to the normal background, and one hour before the game hall is closed The timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied, such as the timing set by a timer such as the timing of, may be an arbitrary timing. In addition, the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied may be a plurality of timings as long as the administrator of the gaming machine can be set. In addition, the timing at the time of the end of the villa is determined, for example, from the first big hit to the big hit in the short-time state as a continuous big hit (renzo), and the end of the short-time state is determined as the timing at the end of the extended villa. That's fine. In addition, the timing when the player's usage amount reaches a specific amount, such as 10,000 yen, becomes, for example, a specific amount (in this case, 10,000 yen) by pressing the ball rental button 20 times. What is necessary is just to determine. For example, even in a period in which variable display is not performed, the simultaneous production is performed in real time for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a game hall during a period in which a game ball is being fired or not being fired. This is an effect that is performed all at once every predetermined period, such as every time when a predetermined time is reached by the clock function (RTC function), or every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. Then, the end timing of the simultaneous performance may be determined based on the fact that the execution time of the simultaneous performance has elapsed since the time determined in advance by the RTC function. Probability latency means that it is difficult to specify whether or not the game is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the big hit gaming state. For example, a common background image is displayed regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the probability change state. This means that it is difficult to specify whether or not the state is controlled to the probability variation state. The timing at which the background indicating the probability variation latent state is switched to the normal background is the normal background image indicating that the probability variation is not latent from the common background image (for example, a background image displayed during the normal state). What is necessary is just to determine the timing which switched to. In the above-described embodiment, an example in which setting suggestion is performed in the case of variable display at the time-short end times has been described. It may be.

(Explanation of means related to the feature 115AK)
Regarding the above-described feature 115AK, as a gaming machine capable of changing settings relating to a game, there is one conventionally described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 115AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production,
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
One of setting values (for example, any one of setting values 1 to 3) can be set from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.
Suggesting effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing setting suggestion according to a set value set) capable of executing an suggested effect according to a set value set;
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, execute a setting suggestion when the variable display of the execution target is a variable display of the short-time end times),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of means 2 relating to the feature 115AK,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect executing means has a higher setting value set as the suggestion effect than the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is suggested that the setting value is highly advantageous to the user (for example, in the variable display of the short-time end times, the setting suggestion indicating the high setting is executed at a higher rate than the variable display other than the short-time end times) ),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 115AK may be used.
According to such a structure, continuation of a game can be promoted and an operating rate can be improved.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature 115AK,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, it is possible to execute setting suggestion by variable display other than the short-time end times)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, whereas the suggestion effect is executed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The reliability of the suggested setting value is low (for example, in variable display at the short end time, the setting suggestion that indicates a high setting is executed at a higher rate than the variable display at other times than the short end time, Low confidence),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 115AK may be used.
According to such a structure, continuation of a game can be promoted and an operating rate can be improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature 115AK,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, it is possible to execute setting suggestion by variable display other than the short-time end times)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggested effect is executed in such a manner that the suggested set value is easier to recognize than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, the setting suggestion that is executed at the end of a short time) Is suggested in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than setting suggestions that are made at times other than the short-time end times (including when the player is in a normal state)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 115AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the feature 115AK,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, initial appearance effect) (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the CPU 120 for effect control) ) And
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by a special initial appearance) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by an even initial appearance) can be executed,
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 By executing step 121IWS313, the initial appearance effect by the special initial appearance is not executed)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 115AK.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding feature 116AK)
Next, the feature part 116AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing executed by the feature unit 116AK. As shown in the drawing, in the variable display start setting process executed in the feature part 116AK, the predetermined effect execution setting process in step 114AKS001 in the variable display start setting process executed in the feature part 114AK (see FIG. 20-35). Instead, a setting suggestion execution setting process is executed in step 116AKS001. The other processes are the same as the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 114AK, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The setting suggestion execution setting process in step 116AKS001 is the same as the setting suggestion execution setting process in the feature part 115AK in that the setting suggestion execution process is performed for setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value), but the feature part 115AK. The setting suggestion in is an effect performed during variable display. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion is performed at a higher rate than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, whereas the setting suggestion in the feature 116AK is performed. Is an effect that is executed regardless of the predetermined condition as in the characteristic portion 115AK, and is different in that it is an effect that the player can easily recognize depending on the execution mode. In the setting suggestion execution setting process of step 116AKS001 in the feature part 116AK, the setting suggestion execution setting different from the feature part 115AK is performed in this way.

  FIG. 20-51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process performed in step 116AKS001 in FIG. 20-50. In the setting suggestion execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-51, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion is executed (step 116AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 116AKS002, whether or not setting suggestion is executed is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 20-52 based on the variable display result. The setting effect in this embodiment is an effect that is performed during variable display, and when it is executed, it is an effect that has a higher expectation level for big hits than when it is not executed. Further, in the processing of step 116AKS002, for example, the timing of execution is determined from among a plurality of timings so that the degree of expectation increases as the timing of execution of setting suggestion is delayed. May be. Further, instead of the variable display result, the execution rate of setting suggestion may be different according to the set value that has been set. For example, when the setting value is “3”> when the setting value is “2”> when the setting value is “1”, the execution rate of the setting suggestion may decrease in order. Furthermore, in addition to the variable display result, the setting suggestion execution ratio may be different depending on the set setting value. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the set value is “3”> the variable display result is “lost”, and the set value is “3”> the variable display result is “big hit” Yes, when the setting value is “2”> The variable display result is “lost”, when the setting value is “2”> The variable display result is “big hit”, and the setting value is “1” Case> The execution rate of the setting suggestion may decrease in the order of “variable display result is“ losing ”and the setting value is“ 1 ”.

  Returning to FIG. 20-51, after executing the processing of step 116AKS002, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the setting suggestion in step 116AKS002, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion is executed (step). 116AKS003). When there is no setting execution suggestion, that is, when it is determined not to execute the setting suggestion at step 116AKS002 (step 116AKS003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 116AKS002 that the setting suggestion is to be executed, that is, if there is a setting suggestion (step 116AKS003; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines an execution mode of the setting suggestion (setting suggestion mode) (step 116AKS004). ), The setting suggestion execution setting process is terminated. Specifically, in the process of step 116AKS004, any one of “setting suggestion mode 1” to “setting suggestion mode 3” is set based on the set setting value and according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. Is determined as an execution mode.

  “Setting suggestion mode 1” in this embodiment is an effect of a mode in which the hitting ball operating handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, and suggests that the set value is “1” (FIG. 20). -54 (A)). The “setting suggestion mode 2” is an effect of a mode in which the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated and a sound is output, and it is suggested that the setting value is “2” ( FIG. 20-54 (B)). The “setting suggestion mode 3” is a mode in which the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, a sound is output, and further, the display is performed on the image display device 5 and various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 are turned on. This is an effect and suggests that the set value is “3” (see FIG. 20-54 (C)). That is, the setting suggestion in the feature part 116AK includes an aspect in which the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content) in the order of “setting suggestion aspect 1” <“setting suggestion aspect 2” <“setting suggestion aspect 3”. It has become. Therefore, since the ease of recognizing the suggested content varies depending on the setting suggestion mode to be executed, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 1” is an effect of an aspect of vibrating the hitting ball operating handle (operation knob) 30, it is an aspect that can be recognized only by the player. The setting suggestion is an effect in which the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, a sound is output, and further, the display is performed on the image display device 5 and various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 are turned on. Therefore, not only the player but also other players, game shop staff, and the like can be recognized. As described above, in the feature portion 116AK, the setting suggestion of the mode that can be recognized only by the player and the setting suggestion of the mode that can be recognized by other than the player are performed, so that it is possible to enhance the effect. In addition, setting suggestions that suggest low setting values are set in a manner that only the player can recognize, and setting suggestions that suggest high setting values can be recognized by non-players. Since the setting suggestion is performed in the mode, it is possible to recognize that the high setting is other than the player, and since it is not recognized other than the player that the setting value is low, the production effect can be enhanced. . For example, the ease of recognition may be changed by changing the display size or hue of the image display device 5. Moreover, there may be a setting suggestion for operating an accessory. In addition to the setting value itself, for example, it is suggested that the setting value is not “1”, is a high setting value, is an even setting value, or is an odd setting value, May be suggested by each aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 20-53, in the feature unit 116AK, each execution mode is set according to the set value so that the setting suggestion is executed with a different execution mode at a different execution ratio according to the set value set. The decision rate is set in Therefore, setting effects of different execution modes according to the setting values are executed at different execution ratios, so that the effect of production can be enhanced. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-53, the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” is determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, when the setting suggestion “setting suggestion mode 3” is performed, it is determined that the setting value is “3”. On the other hand, the setting suggestions of “setting suggestion mode 1” and “setting suggestion mode 2” are determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, when the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 1” or “setting suggestion aspect 2” is performed and when the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 3” is performed, the reliability of the suggestion is different. It has become. That is, in the feature portion 116AK, the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” that allows the player to easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content) is the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 1” and “setting suggestion mode 2”. The suggestion is more reliable. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may increase in the order of “setting suggestion aspect 1” <“setting suggestion aspect 2” <“setting suggestion aspect 3”. That is, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order in which the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content).

  Also, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the player easily recognizes the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content) in the order of “setting suggestion aspect 1” <“setting suggestion aspect 2” <“setting suggestion aspect 3”. However, apart from this, even if the setting suggestion indicates that the setting is “1”, only the mode in which the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, and the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 are used. Even if it is a setting suggestion that suggests the same set value, such as a mode in which the image is displayed on the image display device 5, a mode that the player can easily recognize and a mode that is not so are provided. Any one of the modes may be determined at different determination ratios.

  In step 116AKS004 in FIGS. 20-51, the setting suggestion execution mode (setting suggestion mode) is determined, and the setting suggestion execution timing (including the setting suggestion execution period) to be executed in accordance with this is determined. In the feature 116AK, the setting suggestion execution period of “setting suggestion aspect 3” in which the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested contents) is set to “setting suggestion aspect 1” and “setting suggestion aspect 2”. Set a longer period than suggested. The setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” is that the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, a sound is output, and further, the display is performed on the image display device 5 and various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 are turned on. Since it is an effect of the mode to be performed, it is a mode that can be recognized not only by the player but also by other players such as other players and game shop clerks. Therefore, by setting the execution period of the setting suggestion of the “setting suggestion aspect 3” to a period longer than the setting suggestion of the “setting suggestion aspect 1” and the “setting suggestion aspect 2”, other players, etc. It is possible to more appropriately recognize that setting suggestions suggesting that the setting is high other than the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Modification of feature 116AK)
Although the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 1” in the above embodiment is an example of an effect of a mode in which the hitting ball operating handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, this is an example. In addition, any mode may be used as long as it is a mode that only the player can recognize, such as, for example, vibrating the push button 31B. It should be noted that the modes that can be recognized only by the player include modes that are difficult for non-players to recognize, as well as modes that cannot be recognized by non-players. Therefore, for example, the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 1” is not limited to the effect of the aspect in which the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 and the push button 31B are vibrated. In the image display device 5, the message is displayed in a mode that is difficult to recognize from the player of the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (such as a small display size or the same color as the background color). And that the player of the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the pachinko gaming machine 1 outputs sound at a volume that is difficult to recognize.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” in which the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content) is set as “setting suggestion mode 1” and “setting suggestion mode 2”. In this example, by setting the period longer than the setting suggestion, it is possible to recognize not only players but also other players such as other players and game shop assistants more appropriately. It is. For example, on the contrary, the setting suggestion execution period of “setting suggestion aspect 3” may be set to a period shorter than the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 1” and “setting suggestion aspect 2”. . According to this, since it is difficult for the surrounding people to recognize that the high setting is suggested, a special feeling can be given to the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Explanation of means related to the feature part 116AK)
With respect to the above-described feature portion 116AK, conventionally, as a gaming machine capable of changing settings relating to a game, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 116AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production,
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
One of setting values (for example, any one of setting values 1 to 3) can be set from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.
Suggesting effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing setting suggestion according to a set value set) capable of executing an suggested effect according to a set value set;
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects with different recognizability as the suggestion effect (for example, “setting suggestion mode” rather than “setting suggestion mode 1” or “setting suggestion mode 2”) The suggestion mode 3 ”suggests that the suggested content is easier to recognize)
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic part 116AK,
Among the plurality of types of suggestion effects, the suggestion effects that are easy to recognize have higher reliability of the setting value suggested than the suggestion effects that are difficult to recognize (for example, the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” The reliability of the suggestion is higher than the setting suggestion of “aspect 1” and “setting suggestion aspect 2”),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part 116AK characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic part 116AK,
Among the plurality of types of suggestion effects, the suggestion effects that are easy to recognize have a longer period of suggesting the set value than the suggestion effects that are difficult to recognize (for example, the player can easily recognize the setting suggestions (that is, the suggested contents)). For example, the execution period of the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 3” is set to a longer period than the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion aspect 1” and “setting suggestion aspect 2”),
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 116AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 116AK,
A plurality of types of suggestive effects with different recognizability are suggested as suggested effects that only the player can recognize the suggested setting values (for example, effects of vibrating the hitting ball operating handle 30). The set value includes a suggestion effect that can be recognized by a person other than the player (for example, the hitting operation handle 30 is vibrated and a sound is output, and further displayed on the image display device 5 and the game effect lamp 9) Etc.)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic part 116AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 116AK,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, initial appearance effect) (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the CPU 120 for effect control) ) And
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by a special initial appearance) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by an even initial appearance) can be executed,
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 By executing step 121IWS313, the initial appearance effect by the special initial appearance is not executed)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 116AK.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding the feature 117AK)
Next, the characteristic part 117AK of the present embodiment will be described. 20-55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion mode setting process executed by the feature unit 117AK. The setting suggestion mode setting process shown in FIGS. 20-55 is a process executed in the effect control process process in step S76 (more specifically, after the process in step S161 in FIG. 7). In the feature part 117AK, the execution ratio, execution timing, and suggestion method of the setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value) differ depending on the operation by the manager (game manager) of the gaming machine such as a game shop clerk. Any mode (setting suggestion mode) can be selected from the modes. That is, in the feature part 117AK, the setting regarding the setting suggestion can be performed. Specifically, when a setting suggestion mode switch for setting suggestion mode setting is pressed by a game manager such as a game clerk (a position on the effect control board 12 that can be operated only by the game manager (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 The production control CPU 120 selects the setting suggestion mode in accordance with the operation of the game manager to be subsequently performed. The setting suggestion mode setting process shown in FIG. 20-55 is a process of selecting the setting suggestion mode as one of the modes based on the pressing of the setting suggestion mode switch. After the setting suggestion mode switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is pressed, the plurality of setting suggestion modes are displayed on the image display device 5, for example, a game manager for the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. Any setting suggestion mode can be selected by the operation of. In this embodiment, an example in which a setting suggestion mode in which a combination of a setting suggestion execution ratio, an execution timing, and a suggestion method is preset is selected from a plurality of settings suggestion. The execution timing and the suggestion method may be individually selectable. For example, the setting suggestion mode setting process may be executed within a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, any setting suggestion mode may be selected by pressing the setting suggestion mode switch within a predetermined period after the power is turned on.

  In the setting suggestion mode setting process shown in FIG. 20-55, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion mode setting screen is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 117AKS001). For example, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (A), the setting suggestion mode setting screen is a screen that displays a list of a plurality of prepared suggestion modes and allows any one of the modes to be selected by selection by the game manager. . If the setting suggestion mode setting screen is not being displayed (step 117AKS001; No), it is determined whether a setting suggestion mode designation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS002). If the setting suggestion mode designation command has not been received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS002; No), the setting suggestion mode setting process is terminated.

  If a setting suggestion mode designation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS002; Yes), a setting suggestion mode setting screen for selecting one of the setting suggestion modes is displayed on the image display device 5 (step 117AKS003). . Subsequently, in step 117AKS001, when the setting suggestion mode setting screen is being displayed (step 117AKS001; Yes) or after the setting suggestion mode setting screen is displayed in the processing of step 117AKS003, the setting suggestion mode is changed by the operation means. It is determined whether or not a selection operation has been performed (step 117AKS004). If there is no setting suggestion mode selection operation (step 117AKS004; No), the setting suggestion mode setting process is terminated.

  When the setting suggestion mode is selected (step 117AKS004; Yes), for example, information that can identify the selected setting suggestion mode in the setting suggestion mode storage area of the effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 122 Is stored, the selected setting suggestion mode is stored (step 117AKS005). Any setting suggestion mode may be stored in the setting suggestion mode storage area as an initial value. For example, “setting suggestion mode 2” is stored as an initial value. After the process of step 117AKS005, the setting suggestion mode setting process is terminated. When the setting suggestion mode is stored in step 117AKS005, the setting suggestion mode may be displayed on the screen display device 5 so that the game manager can recognize it.

  The feature portion 117AK has a plurality of setting suggestion modes such as “setting suggestion mode 1” to “setting suggestion mode 3” as shown in FIG. 20-56, and one of them is selected based on the operation of a game manager such as a game clerk. The setting suggestion mode is selected. “Setting suggestion mode 1” has the highest execution ratio of setting suggestion, and can be executed at any time as the execution timing of setting suggestion. Methods such as “sound”, “image”, “lamp”, and “vibration” are suggested methods. In this mode, setting suggestions can be executed. “Setting suggestion mode 2” is a mode in which the setting suggestion execution rate is lower than “setting suggestion mode 1” and the setting suggestion execution rate is higher than “setting suggestion mode 3” described later. This is a mode in which setting suggestion can be executed by methods such as “sound”, “image”, and “vibration”. “Setting suggestion mode 3” has the lowest execution ratio of setting suggestion, and can be executed at a timing such as during the production of a reaching reach or during a big hit as the execution timing of setting suggestion. As suggestion methods, “sound”, “image” It is a mode in which setting suggestion can be executed by a method such as That is, the execution ratio decreases in the order of “setting suggestion mode 1”> “setting suggestion mode 2”> “setting suggestion mode 3”, the execution timing is limited, and the suggestion method is also reduced. As described above, in the setting suggestion mode setting process in the feature unit 117AK, various settings relating to the setting suggestion are possible. Therefore, various modes of setting suggestion can be executed by setting related to the setting suggestion, and the production effect can be enhanced. In the setting suggestion mode setting process in the feature part 117AK, the setting suggestion mode can be set based on an operation by a game manager such as a game store clerk, so that the setting according to the game environment is possible and the effect of the production is enhanced. Can do. In addition to the example shown in the figure, for example, whether the execution ratio for setting suggestions that suggest specific contents, such as setting suggestions that determine that the setting value is “3”, is increased or decreased (whether or not to execute) Setting may also be possible.

  20-57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting suggestion pattern setting process executed by the feature unit 117AK. The setting suggestion pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20-57 is a process executed in the variable display start waiting process in step S170. In the feature part 117AK, as described above, the execution ratio, execution timing, and suggestion method of the setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value) by an operation by a manager (game manager) of a gaming machine such as a game shop clerk. Any mode (setting suggestion mode) can be selected from a plurality of different modes. In the setting suggestion pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20-57, specific setting suggestion execution timing, suggestion method, and display position in the image display device 5 within the range corresponding to the setting suggestion mode set by the game manager. A setting suggestion pattern (setting suggestion pattern) such as (image display position) is set according to the player's operation (operation on the stick controller 31A or push button 31B). In the setting suggestion pattern setting process in the feature portion 117AK, a process of selecting a setting suggestion pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion mode from a plurality according to the player's operation is executed. That is, in the feature portion 117AK, first, a setting suggestion mode is set by a game manager such as a game store clerk, and then a setting suggestion pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion mode set by the game manager is set by the player. Therefore, the player can set the setting suggestion pattern within the range set by the game manager such as a game store clerk, so that the setting according to the gaming environment is possible, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Note that both the setting suggestion mode and the setting suggestion pattern may be settable by the game manager. Further, both the setting suggestion mode and the setting suggestion pattern may be settable by the player. According to this, various settings regarding setting suggestion can be made by the player, and the production effect can be enhanced. In this embodiment, the example of selecting the setting suggestion pattern in which the combination of the execution timing of the setting suggestion, the suggestion method, and the image display position is preset is shown. The method and the image display position may be individually selectable.

  In the setting suggestion pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20-57, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion pattern setting screen is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 117AKS101). For example, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (B), the setting suggestion pattern setting screen is a screen that displays a list of a plurality of prepared suggestion patterns and allows one of the setting suggestion patterns to be selected by selection by the player. is there. If the setting suggestion pattern setting screen is not being displayed (step 117AKS101; No), it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS102). If the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS102; No), the setting suggestion pattern setting process is terminated.

  The customer waiting demonstration designation command is a command transmitted when the demonstration display setting is performed on the main board 11 side when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game is “0”. In the demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to 12, and if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as it is, and if it has not been transmitted, processing for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed. The trigger for starting the demonstration screen display is not limited to this example, and the time after the reserved memory number of the special figure game becomes “0” is measured on the side of the effect control board 12, and a certain period ( For example, when 30 seconds have elapsed, a process for starting display of the demo screen may be executed. In addition, the time after the number of reserved games stored in the special figure game becomes “0” is measured on the main board 11 side, and when a certain period of time has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted to the side of the effect control board 12 You may make it display a demo screen. On the side of the production control board 12, if the production control command is not received from the main board 11 for a predetermined period after the end of the change, it is determined that the player is not playing and the demonstration screen display is started. May be. In addition, the control when starting the demonstration screen display may be arbitrary as long as the demonstration screen can be displayed while waiting for a customer.

  If a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS102; Yes), whether or not an operation for displaying the setting suggestion pattern setting screen has been performed by the player, that is, setting suggestion pattern setting It is determined whether or not a screen transition operation has been performed (step 117AKS103). The setting suggestion pattern setting screen transition operation may be performed by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player. When the setting suggestion pattern setting screen transition operation has not been performed (step 117AKS103; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion pattern setting process.

  On the other hand, when the setting suggestion pattern setting screen transition operation is performed (step 117AKS103; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays a setting suggestion pattern setting screen for selecting one of the setting suggestion patterns in FIGS. It is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the setting suggestion mode set in the setting suggestion mode setting process shown (step 117AKS104). Specifically, in Step 117AKS104, the set setting suggestion mode is specified by checking the setting suggestion mode storage area, and a list of setting suggestion patterns shown in FIGS. 20-58 according to the set suggestion mode is displayed. The setting suggestion pattern setting screen is selectably displayed. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, patterns 1 to 3 are prepared as setting suggestion patterns, and the contents are different depending on the setting suggestion mode even if they are the same pattern. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, even if the setting suggestion mode is different, if the setting suggestion pattern is the same, the execution timing of the setting suggestion is common (that is, some contents) Is the same regardless of the setting suggestion mode). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of setting suggestion from becoming complicated and confusing the player. Note that not only the execution timing but also a common setting suggestion pattern (such as the setting suggestion pattern of the pattern 4 whose contents are all common) may be prepared regardless of the setting suggestion mode. In addition, all the contents including the execution timing may be different depending on the setting suggestion mode even in the same setting suggestion pattern. The example shown in FIG. 20-59 (B) shows an example in which the setting suggestion mode is the setting suggestion mode 2, and the setting suggestion setting of the contents of patterns 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 20-58 (B). An example when the screen is displayed is shown. In the process of step 117AKS104 in FIG. 20-57, such a setting suggestion setting screen is displayed.

  Subsequently, in step 117AKS101, when the setting suggestion pattern setting screen is being displayed (step 117AKS101; Yes), or after the setting suggestion pattern setting screen corresponding to the setting suggestion mode is displayed in the processing of step 117AKS104, the operation is performed. It is determined whether or not a setting suggestion pattern selection operation has been performed by the means (step 117AKS105). If there is no setting suggestion pattern selection operation (step 117AKS105; No), the setting suggestion pattern setting process is terminated.

  When the setting suggestion pattern is selected (step 117AKS105; Yes), for example, information that can identify the selected setting suggestion pattern in the setting suggestion pattern storage area of the effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 122 Is stored, the selected setting suggestion pattern is stored (step 117AKS106). Any setting suggestion pattern may be stored in the setting suggestion pattern storage area as an initial value. For example, “pattern 2” is stored as an initial value. After the process of step 117AKS106, the setting suggestion pattern setting process is terminated. When the setting suggestion pattern is stored in step 117AKS106, the setting suggestion pattern may be displayed on the screen display device 5 or the like so that the player can recognize it.

(Modification of feature 117AK)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the player performs a specific setting related to the setting suggestion within the range of the set suggestion mode in the setting suggestion pattern setting process in FIGS. 20-57, but this is an example. is there. In addition to this, for example, a mission notification effect may be performed so that a player can recognize a certain mission (task or command) in a recognizable manner, and a mission to be achieved may be set by the player. As the effect operation for informing the mission, for example, an effect image indicating the achievement condition is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, a sound that allows the player to recognize the achievement condition is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game By operating predetermined members included in the effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED or lighting the LED to notify the achievement condition, or by operating a movable member provided in the effect object provided inside or outside the game area Any one that notifies the achievement condition or that can present the achievement condition to the player by combining some or all of them may be used. The mission that is notified in this mission notification effect (that is, the mission to be achieved) may include a mission of execution of setting suggestion (in addition, execution of super reach A, execution of variable display effect of pseudo-ream etc.) It is only necessary to prepare multiple types of missions such as missions), and the mission selected by the player's selection operation from the mission list displaying multiple missions should be set as the mission to be achieved .

  When the mission notified by the mission notification effect is achieved, the mission achievement effect is executed. The execution mode of the mission achievement effect (predetermined display mode that can appear) may be any mode according to the type of mission set by the player. For example, if the achieved mission is execution of setting suggestion, It is only necessary to execute the mission achievement effect in a mode corresponding to the executed setting suggestion execution mode. Further, when it is determined that the mission notified by the mission notification effect is not achieved, it is sufficient that the mission failure effect can be executed. Even when the notified mission is not achieved, the variable display result may be “big hit”, or a reach effect by a specific variation pattern may be executed to be in a predetermined display mode. As described above, the mission presented as the achievement condition is based on the fact that it has been achieved, the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the reach effect by the specific variation pattern, etc. is executed and the predetermined display mode On the other hand, what is necessary is that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” even when the mission is not achieved or a reach effect by a specific variation pattern may be executed. Alternatively, even when the mission is achieved, the variable display result may not be “big hit”, or the reach effect by a specific variation pattern may not be executed. In this case, when the variable display result does not become “big hit”, or when the reach effect by a specific fluctuation pattern is not executed, when the variable display result becomes “big hit” or when the reach effect by a specific fluctuation pattern is executed Compared to this, the possibility that the mission will be announced is sufficiently reduced, and when the mission is achieved, the variable display result will be a “big hit”, and the game will be performed with a specific variation pattern The expectation of the person should be raised.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic portion 117AK)
With regard to the above-described feature portion 117AK, there is a conventional gaming machine that can change settings related to a game, for example, in JP 2010-200902A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 117AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production,
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
One of setting values (for example, any one of setting values 1 to 3) can be set from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.
Suggesting effect execution means (for example, executing setting suggestion at a different rate depending on the set value set) capable of executing the suggested effect according to the set value set,
Execution mode setting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a setting suggestion mode setting process) capable of setting the execution mode of the suggestion effect based on the operation of the operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic part 117AK,
The execution mode setting means can set the execution mode of the suggestion effect based on the operation of the operation means by a game shop clerk (for example, the setting suggestion mode setting process can be executed based on the operation of the game shop clerk or the like). Such),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part 117AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, setting according to the gaming environment is possible, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic part 117AK,
The execution mode setting means can set the execution mode of the suggestion effect based on the operation of the operation means by the player (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the setting suggestion setting process).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 117AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic part 117AK,
The execution mode setting means can set the execution mode of the suggestion effect based on the operation of the operation means by the player within the range set by the game store clerk (for example, the setting set by the game manager) Setting suggestion pattern according to suggestion mode is set by the player)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 117AK.
According to such a configuration, setting according to the gaming environment is possible, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 117AK,
It further comprises condition achievement notification execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the mission achievement effect) capable of executing the condition achievement notification for notifying the achievement of the condition when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The condition achievement notification execution means is capable of executing the condition achievement notification in a mode according to the type of the suggested effect that has been executed (for example, if the achieved mission is execution of setting suggestion, the executed setting) For example, a mission achievement effect in a mode corresponding to the execution mode of the suggestion is executed)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 117AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of means 6 according to the characteristic portion 117AK,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, initial appearance effect) (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the CPU 120 for effect control) ) And
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by a special initial appearance) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by an even initial appearance) can be executed,
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 By executing step 121IWS313, the initial appearance effect by the special initial appearance is not executed)
Any one of the means 1 to means 5 according to the characteristic portion 117AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding the feature 118AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 118AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 118AK. As shown in the drawing, in the variable display start setting process executed in the feature part 118AK, the selection effect execution setting process in step 118AKS001 is executed unlike the variable display start setting process executed in the feature part 114AK. Further, in the variable display start setting process executed in the feature part 118AK, instead of the predetermined effect execution setting process (see FIG. 20-35) in step 114AKS001 in the variable display start setting process executed in the feature part 114AK, In step 118AKS002, a setting suggestion execution setting process is executed. The other processes are the same as the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 114AK, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The setting suggestion execution setting process in step 118AKS002 is the same as the setting suggestion execution setting process in the feature part 115AK and the feature part 116AK in that it is a process for performing the setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value). The setting suggestion in the feature portion 115AK is an effect performed during variable display, and is an effect that is executed at a higher rate when the predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and is set in the feature portion 116AK. The suggestion is an effect that is executed regardless of the predetermined condition such as the characteristic portion 115AK, and is an effect that the player can easily recognize depending on the execution mode. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in the feature part 118AK is an effect performed during the execution of the selection effect set in step 118AKS001 (more specifically, during the period in which the options before the effect setting is displayed). It is different in that it is an effect related to the selected effect. In the setting suggestion execution setting process at step 118AKS002 in the feature part 118AK, the setting suggestion execution setting different from the feature part 115AK and the feature part 116AK is thus performed.

  FIG. 20-61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the selection effect execution setting process performed in step 118AKS001 in FIG. 20-60. The selection effect is a step-by-step display of options (including question contents and selection contents (answers) thereof) to the player over a plurality of variations, and the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. This is an effect that sets the type of effect to be executed (performs effect setting) in accordance with the answer pattern selected by (the answer pattern for the displayed option). That is, in the selection effect in the feature portion 118AK, in order to perform the effect setting according to the selection pattern of the option by the player (the answer pattern for the displayed option), the effect setting according to the personality and preference of the player is performed. Is possible. Further, since the selection effect is executed over a plurality of changes (because it is performed as a part of the effect performed during the change), the participation rate of the player with respect to the selection operation can be increased. In addition, the selection effect includes an effect according to the effect setting, which is executed in a change after the effect setting is performed, in addition to the effect of displaying the options in stages. In other words, the selection effect includes an effect according to the effect setting performed after the effect setting is performed, in addition to the effect of displaying the options before the effect setting step by step. As described above, the selection effect of the feature part 118AK is an effect capable of performing an effect setting in accordance with the player's personality and preference over a plurality of variations, thereby enhancing the effect.

  In the selected effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-61, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting completion flag is set to the on state (step 118AKS002). The setting completion flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and indicates that the player has finished selecting an option and has finished setting the effect. The setting completion flag is set to the on state when the final stage option is selected, and is cleared to the off state when the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed. In addition to this, the setting completion flag may be cleared according to the length of the non-game time, for example, that the firing operation is not performed for a predetermined period. In the feature 118AK, choices are displayed on the condition that the setting completion flag is in the off state, and the effect is set.

  If the setting completion flag is in the off state (step 118AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting in progress flag is set in the on state (step 118AKS003). The setting flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and is a flag indicating whether or not an option is being selected by the player. The setting flag is set to ON when the start time option (first stage option) is displayed at step 118AKS004, which will be described later, and when the final stage option is displayed, at step 118AKS109. Set to the off state (the setting completion flag is set to the on state at the same time).

  When the setting flag is off (step 118AKS003; No), the production control CPU 120 assumes that the variable display (fluctuation) is executed when the customer waiting state is changed to the fluctuating state, and determines the start choice (first). The setting of displaying the question content and the answer of the stage on the image display device 5 is performed (step 118AKS004), and the selection effect execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the setting flag is on (step 118AKS003; Yes), the production control CPU 120 selects the selection stage (including the type) and the choices according to the selection contents (the question contents displayed last time and the selection contents (answer) ) Is displayed (options corresponding to)) (step 118AKS005), and the selected effect execution setting process is terminated. Specifically, in the process of step 118AKS005, as shown in FIG. 20-62, the selection stage (including the type) and the choices (including the question content and the selected content (answer)) are displayed. Set up. In this embodiment, the displayed option stages (including types) and the selection contents (answer) by the player are stored. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-62, according to the option stage (including the type) displayed last time and the selected content (answer) (that is, according to the previous question content and the answer). ), A pattern of options to be displayed in advance is prepared. More specifically, for example, when “Yes” is selected as the start time option, in step 118AKS005 executed at the start of the next fluctuation, as shown in FIG. Will be displayed. In addition, when “Yes” is selected in the second stage option A (the option stage is the second stage and the type is the option A), the third stage option A is displayed in the next change. When “No” is selected, a setting for displaying the third-stage option B is performed. In this embodiment, not only the answer of the mode such as “Yes” or “No”, but also the answer of the mode such as “morning” or “night” as shown in the third stage option A, for example, A mode (a specific mode) is provided that can be answered according to the user's preference (the same applies to the third stage option D in FIGS. 20-62). In the example shown in the figure, there are two choices. For example, as shown in the option A in the third stage, in addition to the reply in the form of “morning” or “night”, the aspect of “both are not good” It is also possible to prepare 3 answers and choose 3 options. As described above, in step 118AKS005 of FIG. 20-61, according to the pattern of the displayed option (including the type) and the selection content (selection result) according to the pattern shown in FIG. In accordance with the answer), a setting is made to display options to be displayed in the current fluctuation. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-62, the third stage is set as the final stage option, and the setting A is set according to the answer to the options from the first stage start option to the third stage. The example in which the production setting of ~ setting H is performed is shown. Note that the option display stage is not limited to the third stage, and more stages may be provided, and the same applies to the number of settings. Further, even when different options are displayed at the final stage, there may be a pattern in which the same effect setting is set. In this embodiment, the effects such as setting A to setting H are determined according to the player's selection pattern, and the contents and background of the effect to be executed, the output volume, the brightness of the light to be emitted, etc. are different. Yes. Specifically, in the characteristic portion 118AK, the setting A to the setting H is determined for each player type according to the selection pattern of the player. For example, as a selection pattern of options, a player who selects “Yes” in the second-stage option B shown in FIGS. 20-62 and selects “Yes” in the third-stage option C is active. “Setting E” is determined as a player of a different type. In “Setting E”, a battle effect is generally used as an effect content, a primary color is used as a background, and the output volume is set to be larger than other settings. Is done. Also, for example, a player who selects “Yes” in the second-stage option A shown in FIGS. 20-62 in the second stage and selects “Yes” in the third-stage option A should be careful. “Setting A” is determined as a player of a different type. In “Setting A”, an effect that informs the player in a manner in which the degree of expectation is easily recognized is executed, for example, the expected degree of jackpot is displayed as the number of stars, for example. In addition, the background, the output volume, and the like may be the same as or different from other effect settings. In other words, for each player type, it is only necessary to set in advance the setting contents A to H that are assumed to be preferred by the player of that type. Note that, for example, in the middle of a game, when the determined content of the effect setting does not match the player's preference, it may be possible to change to another effect setting. In this case, it may be possible to store the contents of the effect setting before the change and the effect setting after the change, and increase the options and the effect setting by learning. For example, when “Yes” is answered in the third-stage option C shown in FIG. 20-62 and “Setting E” is determined, and the ratio of the player dislikes the battle effect increases, For example, an option such as “Do you like fighting comics?” May be added, and “setting E1” and “setting E2” may be added according to this answer.

  On the other hand, when the setting completion flag is in the on state (step 118AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting to execute the effect according to any of the settings A to H shown in FIGS. (Step 118AKS006), selection effect execution setting processing is ended. In the processing of step 118 AKS 004 and step 118 AKS 005, the period for displaying options as the selection effect and the answer period are also set (the selection effect period is set). In step 118AKS006, a period for performing an effect corresponding to the set effect setting is set as the selected effect period. If no operation is performed by the player, an arbitrary answer may be selected at the end of the answer period.

  Returning to FIG. 20-60, after executing the selection effect execution setting process in step 118AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion execution setting process (step 118AKS002). FIG. 20-63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process executed by the feature unit 118AK. In the setting suggestion execution setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting completion flag is set to the on state (step 118AKS002). In the characteristic portion 118AK, setting suggestion that is an effect suggesting a set value is performed during execution of the selection effect in which the option is displayed before the effect setting is performed. For this reason, in step 118AKS002, it is determined whether or not the effect setting has already been performed by confirming whether or not the setting completion flag is set to the on state. When the selection completion flag is on (step 118AKS010; Yes), that is, when the effect setting has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion is not executable and performs the setting suggestion execution setting process as it is. finish.

  On the other hand, when the selection completion flag is off (step 118AKS010; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting suggestion is executed (step 118AKS011), assuming that it is a period during which the setting suggestion can be executed. Specifically, in the process of step 118AKS011, whether or not the setting suggestion is executed is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-64 based on the variable display result. The setting effect in this embodiment is an effect that is executed during a period in which options are displayed in the selection effect, and when it is executed, it is an effect that has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than when it is not executed. Further, in the processing of step 118AKS002, for example, the timing of execution is determined from among a plurality of timings so that the degree of expectation increases as the timing at which the setting suggestion is executed is delayed. May be. Specifically, the setting suggestion in the feature portion 118AK is an effect performed during a period in which the option is displayed in the selection effect, and the option is from the first stage to the third stage (final stage), that is, three times. Is displayed over the fluctuations. Therefore, for example, the setting suggestion was made at the timing when the third stage option, which is the final stage, is displayed rather than the setting suggestion being made when the first stage option or the second stage option is displayed. However, you may make it a big hit expectation degree high. In this embodiment, setting suggestion is not performed at the timing when the first-stage option is displayed, that is, when the start-time option is displayed (the setting flag in FIG. 20-60). Step 118AKS002 needs to be performed only when is on). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to select from being reduced due to the setting suggestion being made with the first option. In addition, setting suggestion may be performed at the timing when the first-stage options are displayed. Further, in this embodiment, setting suggestion can be executed at a plurality of timings such as a timing at which the second-stage option is displayed and a timing at which the third-stage option is displayed. It may be executable only.

Further, instead of the variable display result, the execution rate of setting suggestion may be different according to the set value that has been set. For example, when the setting value is “3”> when the setting value is “2”> when the setting value is “1”, the execution rate of the setting suggestion may decrease in order. Furthermore, in addition to the variable display result, the setting suggestion execution ratio may be different depending on the set setting value. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the set value is “3”> the variable display result is “lost”, and the set value is “3”> the variable display result is “big hit” Yes, when the setting value is “2”> The variable display result is “lost”, when the setting value is “2”> The variable display result is “big hit”, and the setting value is “1” Case> The execution rate of the setting suggestion may decrease in the order of “variable display result is“ losing ”and the setting value is“ 1 ”.
Returning to FIG. 20-63, after executing the processing of step 118 AKS 011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting suggestion is determined to be executed in step 118 AKS 011, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion is executed (step 118AKS012). When there is no setting execution suggestion, that is, when it is determined not to execute the setting suggestion in step 118AKS011 (step 118AKS012; No), the production control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 118AKS011 that the setting suggestion is to be executed, that is, if there is a setting suggestion (step 118AKS012; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines an execution mode of the setting suggestion (setting suggestion mode) (step 118AKS013). ), The setting suggestion execution setting process is terminated. Specifically, in the processing of step 118AKS013, “setting suggestion mode 1 (character A)” to “setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)” according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. "Is determined as an execution mode of setting suggestion.

  “Setting suggestion mode 1 (character A)” in this embodiment is a mode in which the image of character A is displayed on the display of options, and is a mode that suggests that the setting value is “1”. “Setting suggestion mode 2 (character B)” is a mode in which the image of character B is displayed on the display of options, and is a mode that suggests that the setting value is “2”. “Setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)” is a mode in which the image of character B is displayed on the display of options, and is a mode that suggests that the setting value is “3”. In addition to the setting value itself, for example, it is suggested that the setting value is not “1”, is a high setting value, is an even setting value, or is an odd setting value, May be suggested by each aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 20-65, in the characteristic portion 118AK, the determination ratio is set such that the setting suggestion can be executed in a different manner at a different execution ratio depending on the set setting value. Therefore, different types of setting suggestions are executed at different execution ratios according to the setting value, so that it is possible to enhance the effect. Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-65, the setting suggestion of the “setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)” is determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, when the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)” is performed, it is determined that the setting value is “3”. On the other hand, the setting suggestions of “setting suggestion mode 1 (character A)” and “setting suggestion mode 2 (character B)” are determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, when setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 1 (character A)” or setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 2 (character B)” is performed, setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)” The reliability of the suggestion is different from the case where is performed. That is, the reliability of the suggestion varies depending on the setting suggestion mode to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute setting suggestions of different types of reliability and enhance the effect of production.

  As described above, in the feature portion 118AK, when the choice is displayed during the change after the execution setting of the selection effect is performed, different character images are displayed on the choice display at different ratios according to the setting value. Execution setting of setting suggestion will be performed. Thereby, during the display of the choices in the selection effect, different mode setting suggestions can be executed at different ratios according to the setting value, and the effect can be enhanced. The setting suggestion is not limited to the character image, and may be performed by various execution modes such as message display, lamp lighting, and voice output.

  FIG. 20-66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect process executed by the feature unit 118AK. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S801). The effect control CPU 120 updates (for example, subtracts 1) the timer value of the effect control process timer, and when an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, for example. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time (fluctuation time) has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a reach effect period for executing the reach effect (step S804). ). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined that it is the reach effect period (step S804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the reach effect, such as displaying a background image for reach effect (step S805).

  After execution of the process of step S805 or when it is determined that it is not the reach effect period (step S804; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the selected effect period (step 118AKS101). The start stage of the selection effect period is the timing for displaying the option (option display timing) or the execution timing of the effect according to the setting content determined in the process of step 118AKS003 or step 118AKS004 in FIG. The length of the effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S532 according to each effect.

  When it determines with it being a selection production period (step 118AKS101; Yes), CPU120 for production control determines whether the setting completion flag is set to an ON state (step 118AKS102). When the setting completion flag is off (step 118AKS102; No), it is subsequently determined whether the setting flag is on (step 118AKS103). The setting flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and is a flag indicating whether or not an option is being selected by the player. The setting flag is set to the on state when the start option (first stage option) is displayed, and is set to the off state when the final stage option is displayed (and the setting is completed). Flag is set to on). When the setting flag is off (step 118AKS103; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the start choice as an image, assuming that the variable display (fluctuation) is performed when the customer waiting state is changed to the fluctuating state. While being displayed on the device 5, the setting flag is set to ON (step 118AKS104). When the player's selection operation is performed on the option displayed at step 118AKS104 (including the case where the selection period is not performed and the answering period ends), the content (stage of the displayed option (including type) is displayed). And the selection contents (answer) by the player) are stored, and the display of the options is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the setting flag is on (step 118AKS103; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the option displayed last time and the option corresponding to the selected content (answer) (step 118AKS105). For example, in step 118AKS105, when the option displayed last time is the start option shown in FIG. 20-62 and the selection content (answer) is “Yes”, the option A of the second stage is displayed. Further, when the option displayed last time is the option of the second stage option A shown in FIG. 20-62 and “Yes” is selected as the selection content (answer), the third stage option A is selected. indicate. After executing the processing of step 118AKS105 shown in FIG. 20-66, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the setting suggestion period (step 118AKS106). The start period of the setting suggestion period only needs to be determined by the process of step 118AKS011 in FIG. 20-63, and the length of the setting suggestion period is determined by the process of step S532 according to the execution mode of the setting suggestion. What is necessary is just to be predetermined in the effect control pattern made. Note that the start of the setting suggestion period may be different depending on the execution mode of the setting suggestion. When the player's selection operation is performed on the options displayed at step 118AKS105 (including when the selection operation is not performed and the answer period ends), the contents (stages of displayed options (including types) are also displayed. And the selection contents (answer) by the player) are stored, and the display of the options is deleted. If the displayed option is the final option, the effect setting corresponding to the selected content is stored.

  When it is the setting suggestion period (step 118AKS106; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion of the aspect determined in step 118AKS013 of FIG. 20-63 (step 118AKS107). After executing the process of step 118AKS107 or when it is determined in step 118AKS106 that it is not the setting suggestion period (step 118AKS106; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the option displayed in the process of step 118AKS105 is the final stage option. (Step 118AKS108). When the displayed option is the final option (step 118AKS108; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the setting flag to the off state and sets the setting completion flag to the on state (step 118AKS109).

  When it is determined in step 118AKS102 that the setting completion flag is in the on state (step 118AKS102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control according to the setting content, that is, any effect setting from setting A to setting H. The control which performs the corresponding production is performed (step 118AKS110).

  After executing any of the processing of step 118AKS110, step 118AKS104, or step 118AKS109, when it is determined that it is not the selection effect period at step 118AKS101 (step 118AKS101; No), or when it is determined that it is not the final stage at step 118AKS108 (Step 118AKS108; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes effects during variable display including variable display operation of decorative symbols, based on the settings in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. Is performed (step S808), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S809). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S809; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits.

  When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) that is the display result in variable symbol display (step S810). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a jackpot start designation command reception waiting time (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S812), and ends the effect process during variable display. In this way, selection effects and setting suggestions are executed in the feature portion 118AK.

  20-67 shows an example of the effect operation when the selection effect and the setting suggestion are executed. In the example shown in the figure, an example is shown in which setting suggestion of setting suggestion mode 3 (character C) is performed at the timing when the second-stage option is displayed. When the transition starts from the customer waiting state to the variation state, as shown in FIG. 20-67 (A), as shown in FIG. 20-67 (A), the option 118AK001 including the question content corresponding to the start-time option and the selected content (answer) indicate. Then, the fluctuation is completed as shown in FIG. Subsequently, when the next change is started and the selection effect period is reached, when it is determined “Yes” in the start time option, as shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-1), as the option 118AK001, the second Stage option A is displayed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 20-67 (C-1), the case where it is determined not to execute the setting suggestion is illustrated. On the other hand, when it is determined “No” as the start option, the second-stage option B is displayed as the option 118AK001 as shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-2). In the example illustrated in FIG. 20-67 (C-2), the case where it is determined to execute the setting suggestion is illustrated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-2), setting suggestion mode 3 (character C) is suggested together with the option 118AK001, and an image of character C is displayed on the option. The position where the character image as the setting suggestion is displayed may be an arbitrary position. If it is determined as “Yes” at the start option, the second-stage option A is displayed as option 118AK001 as shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-1). When it is decided to execute, setting suggestion is performed as in FIG. 20-67 (C-2), and in the case of setting suggestion mode 3 (character C), an image of character C is displayed on the options. The

  Subsequently, after the second-stage options shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-1) and FIG. 20-67 (C-2) are displayed, depending on the selection contents (answer) of the options, The options at the final stage are displayed, and depending on the selected content (answer), production settings are made according to the selected content, as shown in FIGS. 20-67 (D-1) and 20-67 (D-2). . In the example shown in FIG. 20-67 (D-1), “Setting A” is set as the effect setting, and in the example shown in FIG. 20-67 (D-2), “Setting E” is set as the effect setting. Show. Thereafter, in the continuously executed variation, an effect in a mode corresponding to the set effect setting is executed. In addition, although the example which performs a setting suggestion by displaying a character image on the choice containing question content and its selection content (answer) is shown, for example, when displaying on question content, and selection content ( It may be displayed on top of “Yes” or “No”. Also, for example, instead of displaying a character image, the display color of the question content or the display color of the selection content is set to a display color different from the normal time (for example, one of three modes such as green, blue, and red). The setting suggestion may be performed as follows.

(Modification of feature 118AK)
In the setting suggestion in the above embodiment, an example in which the character image is displayed on the display of options has been shown, but this is an example. For example, the option displayed in the selection effect is set by selecting an option with special contents different from the question contents shown in FIGS. 20-62, such as “Can I cancel the afternoon schedule?” You may make suggestions. Specifically, in the setting suggestion execution setting process in step 118AKS002 of FIG. 20-60, when setting suggestion is executed, a question content of special content may be determined from a plurality of questions as an execution mode. Then, after the selection effect execution setting process is performed in step 118AKS001 in FIG. 20-60, the setting suggestion execution setting process is performed in step 118AKS002, and when setting suggestion is executed, the setting is displayed to be displayed in step 118AKS001. The selected option may be changed to the setting suggestion (determined question content) determined in the setting suggestion execution setting process in step 118AKS002. In addition, as a setting suggestion aspect, as shown to FIGS. 20-65, the special content of 3 aspects should just be prepared. That is, in the modification, the setting suggestion is executed by displaying it as an option in the selection effect. According to this, since options with special contents can be displayed, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  FIG. 20-68 shows an example of the effect operation when the selection effect and the setting suggestion in the modification are executed. In the illustrated example, setting suggestion mode 3 (character C) is suggested together with option 118AK001 as shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-2), and an image of character C is displayed on the option. Unlike FIG. 20-68 (C-2), special contents 118AK002 are displayed when setting suggestion is executed. As shown in the figure, when displaying special contents, a display frame or display frame is displayed more than when normal options (options of preset patterns and contents shown in FIGS. 20-62) are displayed. The message (including the selection contents) is displayed in a manner that is easily recognized by the player so that the message is displayed thick, large, and blinking. As described above, in the setting suggestion in this modification, the player displays the special content options in a manner that makes it easier to recognize than the normal options. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that any mode may be used as long as the player can easily recognize the option with the special content rather than the normal option. Further, the character image displayed in the setting suggestion in the above embodiment may be displayed in a manner that the player can recognize more easily, for example, blinking the character image. That is, in this modification, an image (for example, a special content option or a character image) displayed in the setting suggestion is displayed in a manner that is easier to recognize than a normal option. According to this, the production effect can be enhanced. If it is determined that the start option is “Yes”, the second-stage option A is displayed as the option 118AK001 as shown in FIG. 20-68 (C-1). If it is determined to be executed, the special content 118AK002 may be displayed as in FIG. 20-68 (C-2).

  Moreover, although the example which displays the option of special contents as an option for performing production | presentation setting as the selection effect in the said embodiment was shown in the said modification, this is an example. For example, instead of the selection effect selection that the player selects as in the above-described embodiment, for example, “reach opportunity”, “super reach”, “NEXT”, etc., a super reach reach effect is performed. Multiple choices such as a choice indicating that a variable display effect is to be performed, and a choice of which is selected over time (selected regardless of operation). As one of the options in the production, for example, a suggestion image that suggests a setting value such as “setting 2” may be displayed. For example, when the “chance” option is selected, the reach state is reached and the reach effect is executed (including normal reach), and when the “super reach” option is selected, the reach result of the super reach is executed. When the “NEXT” option is selected, an effect of the contents of the selected option may be executed, such as a pseudo-variable variable display effect. In other words, the suggestion image is displayed as one of the options for the roulette effect in which one of the options is selected from the plurality of options over time without causing the operation. According to this, setting suggestion can be performed as an integral part of the roulette effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic portion 118AK)
With regard to the above-described feature portion 118AK, conventionally, as a gaming machine capable of changing settings relating to a game, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 118AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production,
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
One of setting values (for example, any one of setting values 1 to 3) can be set from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.
A selection effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for displaying an option in the selection effect) capable of displaying a plurality of option images as a plurality of options and executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the option images; ,
When the selection effect is executed by the selection effect execution means, it is possible to display a suggestion image corresponding to a set value that has been set (for example, depending on the setting value when an option is displayed during fluctuation) Display different character images in different proportions on the choice display),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of means 2 according to the characteristic part 118AK,
When the execution condition is satisfied, the selection effect execution means can execute the selection effect over a plurality of variable displays (for example, execute the selection effect when a transition is made from a customer waiting state to a variation state). ,
An effect mode can be set by selecting the plurality of option images displayed over the plurality of variable displays (for example, a selection pattern of options by a player (a pattern of responses to displayed options)) Etc.)
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part 118AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic part 118AK,
The selection effect execution means can be displayed including the suggestion image in the plurality of option images (for example, setting suggestion by setting an option displayed in the selection effect as an option of special contents),
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 118AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic part 118AK,
The selection effect execution means can display the suggestion image in a manner that the player can recognize more easily than the plurality of option images (for example, an image displayed by setting suggestion (for example, an option of special content or a character image) ) In a way that is easier to recognize than normal options)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 118AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 118AK,
The selection effect execution means can display the suggestion image and an effect notification image for notifying the content of a predetermined effect executed when selected, as the plurality of option images, and any of the options It is possible to execute the selection effect in which an image is selected regardless of a player's selection operation (for example, a roulette effect in which any option is selected from a plurality of options without causing an operation over time) A suggested image as one of the options)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 118AK.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of means 6 relating to the characteristic part 118AK,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, initial appearance effect) (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the CPU 120 for effect control) ) And
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by a special initial appearance) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an initial appearance effect by an even initial appearance) can be executed,
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 By executing step 121IWS313, the initial appearance effect by the special initial appearance is not executed)
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 5 according to the characteristic portion 118AK.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Explanation for associating feature parts)
Each configuration related to the feature unit 31AK, the feature unit 121IW, and the feature unit 112AK to the feature unit 118AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature units. About the characteristic part combined in this way, or the individual characteristic part which is not combined, you may combine suitably a part or all of each structure regarding another characteristic part. For example, in the feature unit 121IW, an odd initial output or special initial output is set even though a set value is set in an unfavorable manner when a set value command cannot be received normally due to command omission or data corruption. The situation of disappointing the player by dismissing the player's eyes is reduced, and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing. This feature is applied to the setting suggestion in the feature 112AK to feature 118AK, and is not limited to the set value command. If a command missed or data garble necessary for the production of the set suggestion occurs, a disadvantageous set value The setting suggestion suggesting that the setting value is low may be executed so as to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion suggesting an advantageous setting value for the player even though is set.

  For example, as an example of the setting suggestion mode in the feature portion 117AK, there may be a mode in which the effect setting in the feature portion 118AK is possible. For example, as an example of the setting A to setting H of the effect setting in the feature portion 118AK, for example, any one feature portion of the feature portion 31AK, the feature portion 112AK to the feature portion 116AK, or a combination of a plurality of feature portions is set as the effect setting. May be determined as

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Title informing means capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggestion effect.

Images